department of transportation gage subarea …...kansas license # 17604 3. responsible for...

S T A T E O F K A N S A S

B I D & C O N S T R U C T I O N D O C U M E N T S

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

BLDG NO.: 27600-14016

TOPEKA, KANSAS

A-013861

JULY 2020 STATE OF KANSAS DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION OFFICE OF FACILITIES & PROPERTY MANAGEMENT

SET NO. ___________ ANGIE HADEN, ARCHITECT VOLUME 1 THE CLARK ENERSEN PARTNERS SEAL SHEETS THROUGH DIVISION 13 2020 BALTIMORE STREET, SUITE 300 KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI 64108 PHONE: 816- 474-8237 E-MAIL ADDRESS: [email protected]

JULY 2020 A-013861 KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

00 00 02-1 SEALS PAGE

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. Angela Haden 2. Kansas License # 6181 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

011000 01 23 00 012500 012600 012900 013100 013300 014000 014523 015000 017300 017700 017823 017839 017900 024116

024119 055000 05 52 13 061000 061600 064023 064116 072100 072500 076200 079200 081113 081416 083613 084113 084523 087100 088000 088300 092216 092900 093000 095113 096500 096513 096813 099123 09 96 00 101100 101410 101419 102600 102800 104413 105113 107500 122413 123661 133419

B. Structural Engineer:

1. David Niemann 2. Kansas License # 17604 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

03 30 00 04 22 00 05 21 00 05 31 00 054000



C. Plumbing Engineer:

1. Jared Palan 2. Kansas License # 24472 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

210500 210513 210519 210529 210553 211313 220500 220519 220529 220553 220719 221000 221119 222123 223000 224000 226113

D. HVAC Engineer:

1. Jared Palan 2. Kansas License # 24472 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

230500 230513 230529 230553 230593 230713 232300 233113 233300 233423 233700 235100 235400 235523 237200 23 82 39



E. Electrical Engineer:

1. Daniel Wroblewski 2. Kansas License #25168 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

260500 260501 260519 26 05 26 260533 262416 262726 265100 283100

F. Landscape Architect:

1. Sean Ray 2. Kansas License #813 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

311000 312000 312500 321616 321313 323113



G. Civil Engineer

1. Tyler Wyson 2. Kansas License # 3. Responsible for Specification Sections:

331100 333100 334100

END OF DOCUMENT 000107

JULY 2020 A-013861

KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 1 No. of PAGES DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document A Notice to Bidders ................................................................................................................. 2 Document B Instructions to Bidders ......................................................................................................... 6 Document C Form of Bid .......................................................................................................................... 5 Document D General Conditions of the Contract ..................................................................................... 28 Document E Supplemental General Conditions ........................................................................................ 3 Document F Form of Contract (DA-141A) ................................................................................................ 2 Document G Form of Performance Bond .................................................................................................. 1 Document H Form of Public Works Bond ................................................................................................. 1 Document I Form of Appointment of Service Agent ................................................................................. 1 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 4 01 23 00 Alternates ……………………………………………………………………………………………….2 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures ........................................................................................................ 3 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures ......................................................................................... 2 01 29 00 Payment Procedures ............................................................................................................ 5 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination ................................................................................ .9 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ........................................................................................................... 9 01 40 00 Quality Requirements ........................................................................................................... 8 01 45 23 Special Inspections ............................................................................................................... 5 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ......................................................................................... 8 01 73 00 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 8 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ............................................................................................................ 6 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ......................................................................................... 8 01 78 39 Project Record Documents ................................................................................................... 4 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training .................................................................................................. 6 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 16 Structure Demolition ..... ………………………………………………………………………………7 02 41 19 Selective Demolition ............................................................................................................. 6 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete ....................................................................................................... 17 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry ....................................................................................................... 14 DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 21 00 Steel joist framing……………………………………………………………………………………...5 05 31 00 Steel decking…………………………………………………………………………………………...5 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ................................................................................................. 9 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ................................................................................................................ 9 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings ......................................................................................................... 9 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry .................................................................................................................. 7 06 16 00 Sheathing ............................................................................................................................. 6 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork . …………………………………………………………………….9 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ..................................................................... 9

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOSITURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ................................................................................................................ 6 07 25 00 Weather Barriers ................................................................................................................. 4

JULY 2020 A-013861

KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

TOC - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 1

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ............................................................................................. 9 07 92 00 Joint Sealants ....................................................................................................................... 7 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ........................................................................................... 8 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ................................................................................................................ 6 08 36 13 Sectional Doors .................................................................................................................. 10 08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts ....................................................................... 9 08 45 23 Insulated Translucent Fiberglass Sandwich Panel Wall System ............................................ 6 08 71 00 Door Hardware ................................................................................................................... 12 08 80 00 Glazing ................................................................................................................................. 5 08 83 00 Mirrors .................................................................................................................................. 5 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing ............................................................................................... 6 09 29 00 Gypsum Board ..................................................................................................................... 7 09 30 00 Tiling .................................................................................................................................... 7 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings...................................................................................................... 4 09 65 00 Resilient Sheet Flooring ........................................................................................................ 7 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories ............................................................................................ 6 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting ....................................................................................................................... 7 09 91 23 Interior Painting .................................................................................................................... 9 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings ................................................................................................ 11 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces ........................................................................................................ 3 10 14 10 Interior Signage ………………………………………………………………………………………..4 10 14 19 Dimensional letter signage …………………………………………………………………………...5 10 26 00 Wall Protection ..................................................................................................................... 4 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories.................................................................................................. 6 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets ....................................................................................................... 4 10 51 13 Metal lockers……………………………………………………………………………………………3 10 75 00 Flagpoles…………………………………………………………………………………………….….3 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT - NOT USED DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades ......................................................................................................... 6 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops ............................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems ...................................................................................................... 26 DIVISION 14 THROUGH 21 - NOT USED END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 1

July 2020 A-013861 Gage Subarea Modification

A - 1

NOTICE TO BIDDERS

DOCUMENT A - NOTICE TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ANNOUNCEMENT OF REQUEST FOR BIDS:

A. The Secretary, Department of Administration announces his request that Bids be submitted for the following construction:

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

BLDG NO.: 27600-14016

TOPEKA, KANSAS

A-013861

B. Award, when made, will be single Contract for the "Project as a whole" including all Work for total construction.

1.2 RECEIVING, PUBLIC OPENING AND READING OF BIDS:

A. Sealed bids will be received by the Deputy Director, Procurement and Contracts, Department of Administration, Suite 451S, 900 S.W. Jackson Street, Topeka, Kansas 66612 until 2:00 p.m. (local time) on August 20, 2020 and will at that time and place be publicly opened and read aloud.

1.3 ELECTRONIC BID DOCUMENTS:

A. All parties interested in obtaining bid documents are responsible for registering on the Integrated Digital Technologies (IDT) website: http://kansasdfm.contractorsplanroom.com/.

B. Bidders may view the bid documents on the IDT website, download the bid documents for viewing or printing “in-house” or have the electronic files sent to a printing company of their choice.

C. Bidders will be solely responsible for the cost of printing the bid documents. OFPM will not issue any printed bid documents for bidding.

D. Only parties registered on the IDT website for a project will receive issued Addendums.

E. All tiers of bidders are responsible for understanding the full scope of work covered by the bid documents.

F. Upon award of a contract, the Contractor will be provided up to ten (10) sets of printed bid documents. The contractor is responsible for picking up the bid documents or paying for them to be shipped.

1.4 OBTAINING INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS:

A. Questions concerning the Instructions to Bidders, Form of Contract, Insurances and Bonds shall be addressed to Procurement and Contracts, Department of Administration, Suite 451S, 900 S.W. Jackson Street, Topeka, Kansas 66612, telephone (785) 296-0408, fax (785) 296-7240.

B. If there is a disclaimer of any responsibility by the Project Architect/Engineer for construction documents other than those specifically authenticated by their seal, it in no way waives their contractual obligation to coordinate all the construction documents on the project.

http://kansasdfm.contractorsplanroom.com/


A - 2

NOTICE TO BIDDERS

C. Questions concerning the Construction Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications) shall be addressed to the Design Team at:

ANGIE HADEN, ARCHITECT THE CLARK ENERSEN PARTNERS 2020 BALTIMORE STREET, SUITE 300 KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI 64108 PHONE: 816- 474-8237 E-MAIL ADDRESS: [email protected]

1.5 BID RESULTS:

A. Bid results will not be given to individuals over the phone. Results can be obtained by attending the public bid opening. If unable to attend the public bid opening, bid tabulations can be obtained by sending an e-mail to [email protected] or in writing to Kansas Procurement and Contracts, Attn: Bid Results, 900 SW Jackson, Ste. 451, Topeka, KS 66612-1286. Please reference the DCC Project number on the request. There is no charge for individual tab sheets. Copies of individual bids may be obtained under the Kansas Open Records Act by calling (785) 296-0002, requesting an estimate of the cost to reproduce the documents, and remitting that amount to the above address. Upon receipt of the funds, the documents will be sent.

B. Bid results may also be obtained from the Office of Facilities and Property Management; Design, Construction & Compliance. Results will be available three (3) working days after the bid opening by accessing the on-line planroom at http://kansasdfm.contractorsplanroom.com/.

END OF DOCUMENT A

mailto:[email protected]

http://kansasdfm.contractorsplanroom.com/


B - 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

DOCUMENT B - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 METHOD OF BIDDING AND AWARDING:

A. Bids must be submitted on the Form of Bid issued with each set of Construction Contract Documents.

B. A single Contract will be awarded for the "Project as a whole," including the following classification(s) of work:

1. Demolition

2. General

3. Sitework

4. Roofing

5. Paving 6. Mechanical

7. Electrical

8. Plumbing

9. Fire Protection

C. Note: Kansas Statute K.S.A. 75-3741 as amended requires each bidder to list and identify the "major

subcontractors" for mechanical and electrical construction as part of the bid when a single Contract for the "Project as a whole" is to be awarded.

1.2 CONTRACTOR PRE-QUALIFICATION

A. This project requires that all contractors wishing to bid as the prime must be pre-qualified by the Office of Facilities and Property Management.

B. For more information on pre-qualification please visit http://www.admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc and follow the links to contractor pre-qualification or call (785) 296-8899.

C. Bids submitted by contractors not pre-qualified will be returned to the bidder unopened.

1.3 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Any or all bidders may be required by the Director, Procurement and Contracts to furnish information to support the bidder's capability to comply with conditions for bidding and to fulfill the Contract if awarded the Contract. Such information may include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Proof of registration with the Kansas Director of Taxation by non-resident Bidders (K.S.A. 79-1009).

2. Proof of registration with the Kansas Secretary of State by foreign corporations.

3. List of projects of comparable size and type the bidder has constructed or in which the bidder has been engaged in a responsible capacity.

4. Evidence the bidder maintains a permanent place of business.

5. A current financial statement.

http://www.da.ks.gov/fp/


B - 2


6. Contractor's Compliance Report and Plan of Action in accordance with provisions of the Kansas Act Against Discrimination (K.S.A. 1978, Supp. 44-1030 and 44-1031).

7. When applicable, provide proof of bidder's authorization for removal, handling and disposal of friable asbestos containing material by attachment of a copy of the Kansas Department of Health and Environment's license to perform said activities. (Ref. K.S.A. 65-5301 et seq.)

1.4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE:

A. Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall carefully examine all Construction Contract Documents pertaining to the work and visit the location of the work to verify conditions under which the work will be performed. Submission of a bid will be considered presumptive evidence the bidder is conversant with local facilities and difficulties, requirements of the Construction Contract Documents and pertinent State and/or local codes and the labor and material markets and that he has made due allowances in his bid for all contingencies. Failure to visit the location of the work may be grounds to reject a bid.

B. Include in bid all costs for labor, materials, equipment, fees, taxes, insurances and other contingencies, with overhead and profit, as necessary to produce a complete installation of the work specified under headings covered by the bid (including all trades specified) without further cost to the Owner.

1.5 PROJECT DOCUMENTS:

A. The Project documents consist of the following items:

1. Document A - Notice to Bidders

2. Document B - Instructions to Bidders

3. Document C - Form of Bid

4. Document D - General Conditions of the Contract (DA-144)

5. Document E - Supplemental General Conditions

6. Document F - Form of Contract (executed)

7. Document G - Form of Performance Bond (executed)

8. Document H - Form of Public Works Bond (executed)

9. Document I - Form of Appointment of Process Agent by Nonresident Contractor (executed)

10. Drawings (when included)

11. Technical Specifications

12. Addenda to Drawings and/or Specifications, duly issued

13. Bid Guaranty

14. Proof of required insurance coverages

15. Notice to Proceed

16. Change Orders

17. Laws and regulations

18. Certificate of Project Completion

19. Project Guarantee

20. Code Footprint


B - 3


21. Certificate of Occupancy

1.6 INTERPRETATION OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS:

A. Should a bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Specifications and/or Drawings, or if there is doubt as to their meaning, the bidder shall advise the Project Architect/Engineer at once.

B. Requests for clarifications and interpretations of the Construction Contract Documents (Technical

Specifications and Drawings) shall be presented to the Project Architect/Engineer in writing at least ten (10) days prior to the date on which bids are to be opened.

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Construction Contract Documents will be made only by

Addenda issued to all known persons having same. The Project Architect/Engineer, state agency personnel or Procurement and Contracts will not be responsible for providing any other explanation or interpretation of the Construction Contract Documents.

D. Any clarification or interpretations of the meaning of the Drawings, Specifications, or other pre-Bid

Documents made orally to any Bidder shall not be used by the bidders in preparation of a bid amount unless confirmed in writing via an addendum

E. Receipt of all Addenda shall be acknowledged on the Form of Bid and upon execution of the Contract,

all addenda will become a part of the agreement. 1.7 BID AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTY:

A. Each bid submitted in connection with this Project shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check or bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the base bid, payable without condition to the State of Kansas.

B. The bid bond shall be accompanied by a Power of Attorney showing the authority of the person executing the bond on behalf of the Surety Company and should be approved by the Director, Procurement and Contracts prior to opening of bids.

C. An annual bid bond on file with the Director, Procurement and Contracts, may be acceptable for this transaction providing it is equal to or greater than five percent (5%) of the base bid and is payable without condition to the State of Kansas. This bond must be accompanied by a Power of Attorney showing the authority of the person executing the bond on behalf of the Surety Company.

Note: Use of an annual bid bond must be approved by the Director, Procurement and Contracts a minimum of five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. The Director of Procurement and Contracts may disapprove the use of an annual bid bond if said bond is being used as a bid guaranty on more than one (1) project at the same time.

D. In the event of an award, the responsible bidder offering the lowest bid price meeting Specifications will

be required to enter into a Contract and provide proof of insurance in the amount required for the project. Said bidder shall also provide a Performance Bond for the full amount of the Contract. In addition, the bidder will be required to furnish a Public Works Bond for a project of $100,000 or greater, for the full amount of the contract. A Certificate of Deposit, in an amount of 100% of the Contract amount, may be substituted for a Performance and Public Works Bond. All the above documents must be completed and returned within fifteen (15) calendar days after their receipt. Failure to return these documents within the required time period may cause a cancellation of the award and a forfeiture of the full amount of the bid guaranty. Procurement and Contracts may also suspend a bidder from bidding State construction work for six (6) months for failure to comply with this section.

E. Bond forms will be provided by Procurement and Contracts and must be executed with a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Kansas.

F. Bid Guaranties (submitted by certified or cashier's checks) will be returned to unsuccessful bidders when the successful bidder is determined and a Contract executed. The Bid Guaranty of the successful bidder will be returned when the contract, required Bonds and Insurances are furnished and accepted by


B - 4


Procurement and Contracts. Bid guaranties submitted in the form of a certified or cashier's check will be returned on a State of Kansas warrant.

1.8 APPOINTMENT OF PROCESS AGENT BY NONRESIDENT CONTRACTOR:

A. Pursuant to provisions of K.S.A. 16-113, as amended, a nonresident individual, partnership or unincorporated association, if awarded a Contract, will be required to appoint an agent who is a resident of Kansas who may receive process in any civil action arising from the Contract.

B. The appointment form will be provided by the Procurement and Contracts and must be executed and filed with the Secretary of State as provided by K.S.A. 60-306 and amendments thereto, with a receipt therefore provided to Procurement and Contracts.

1.9 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BID:

A. Each bid shall be made on the Form of Bid accompanying these instructions. All blank spaces on the Form of Bid shall be filled in. Quote the prices for alternate bids and unit prices as requested.

B. Bid shall not contain recapitulation of work to be done.

C. Bid shall be presented under sealed cover, plainly marked with title of Agency, Building Name, Project Title, Location and, Project number.

D. Bid must be received by the Director, Procurement and Contracts not later than the scheduled closing time.

E. Prior to the complete execution of a construction contract this project may be canceled at any time by the State. Neither the State of Kansas nor any of its agencies, employees or agents shall be responsible for any bid preparation costs, or any costs or charges of any type, should all bids be rejected or the project canceled for any reason prior to the complete execution of a construction contract.

1.10 SIGNING FORM OF BID:

A. Bids which are not signed by the individuals making them shall have attached to them a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid in the name of the person for whom it is signed.

B. Bids which are signed for co-partnerships shall be signed by all of the co-partners or by an attorney-in-fact. If signed by an attorney-in-fact, there shall be attached to the bid a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid.

C. Bids which are signed for corporations shall have the correct corporate name signed in handwriting or in typewriting and the signature of the president or other authorized officer of the corporation shall be manually written below the written corporate name, above the words "by (signature)." If such a bid is manually signed by an official other than the president of the corporation, a resolution of the board of directors evidencing the authority of the official to sign the bid shall be attached.

D. If bids are signed for any other legal entity, the authority of the person signing for the legal entity shall be attached to the bid.

1.11 SUBCONTRACTS:

A. Bidders must submit the names and addresses of the major subcontractors for the project as identified on the Form of Bid. If awarded a Contract for the project, the names of the subcontractors will be included as part of the contract. Any changes in listed subcontractors shall be subject to approval by the Secretary of Administration. Only one subcontractor may be listed for each category.

B. If project alternates are listed in the Construction Contract Documents, and the choice of major subcontractors is dependent upon the combinations of alternates the Owner elects to include as a part of the work, a separate sheet shall be attached to the Form of Bid designating the different combinations of such major subcontractors.


B - 5


1.12 FAX MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS

A. Facsimile (fax) transmissions of bids will not be accepted. However, fax modifications to previously submitted bids will be acceptable. When making fax modifications do not submit on Document C – Form of Bid. State only the ADD or DEDUCT amount to be ADDED or DEDUCTED to or from the base bid, alternate bid, or unit price. Do not give a new total price for the selection. Any changes to listed Subcontractors need to be listed on faxed modification as well. Procurement and Contracts fax number is (785) 296-7240.

B. Do not send Certificate of Tax Clearance in with Fax Modifications or as a Fax Modification. If not submitted with original bid all bidders and major sub-contractors will have 48 hours after bid openings to submit Certificate of Tax Clearance.

1.13 PUBLIC BID OPENING:

A. On the date and at the hour scheduled for closing, the Director, Procurement and Contracts or an authorized representative will open and read the bids publicly for interested bidders or others who may be present.

B. Information obtained at public openings is preliminary only and it shall not be construed the apparent low bidder has met all conditions and Specifications of the bid.

C. If the state offices in Topeka/Shawnee County should be closed due to inclement weather or any other unforeseen condition and we have a project scheduled to bid, all bid openings will be canceled.

1. The revised bid date will be published when we return to the office and will be issued via an

addenda.

2. To find information on state office closings, refer to local media sites. (www.wibw.com and www.kansasfirstnews.com)

1.14 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS:

A. Any bidder may withdraw a bid at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, but after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, no bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days subject to the provisions of K.S.A.75-6901 et seq. If a bid is withdrawn after the scheduled closing time, it may result in the forfeiture of all or part of the bid guaranty.

1.15 AWARD OF CONTRACT:

A. A Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder meeting conditions and specifications imposed in the call for bids, but the Director, Procurement and Contracts reserves the right to accept any or all bids or to reject any or all bids for sufficient reason(s) and to waive all technicalities if deemed to be in the best interest of the State of Kansas.

B. In the event bid Alternates are listed in the bid documents, bidders are advised that the Owner is not restricted to selecting Alternates in numerical order as listed on Document C - Form of Bid. The sole intent of this provision is to allow the Agency maximum flexibility to incorporate enhancements into the project.

C. At the time of award, Procurement and Contracts will provide the successful bidder with the Contract Forms, the Performance and Public Works Bond Forms and Appointment of Process Agent Form, if applicable, accompanied by instructions for execution, and will also request submission of proof of certain Insurance coverages.

D. The executed Contract, Bonds, and Insurance documents as well as a receipt for filing the Public Works Bond and the Appointment of Process Agent Form with the Clerk of the District Court in the county where the work is to be performed, must be returned to and received by Procurement and Contracts within fifteen (15) working days.

E. Failure on the part of the Contractor to provide the executed documents within fifteen (15) working days

http://www.wibw.com/

http://www.kansasfirstnews.com/

July 2020 A-013861Gage Subarea Modification

B - 6 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

may result in withdrawal of the award, re-awarding to the next lower bidder or rebidding the contract and forfeiture of all or part of the bid guaranty.

1.16 NOTICE TO PROCEED:

A. A Notice to Proceed will be issued by the Office of Facilities and Property Management upon receipt byProcurement and Contracts of the Contractor’s signed copy of the Contract and required approvedinsurance documents.

B. When DCC receives copies of the signed contracts from Procurement and Contracts, DCC will write theNotice to Proceed for contract time to start the next day in accordance with the construction contractstipulations.

C. The Contractor will also be required to submit the required bonds and Appointment of Process AgentForm (if applicable) to Procurement and Contracts. The Contractor will be allowed to proceed prior toreceipt of the bonds and Process Agent Form, but no payments will be made until all these documentsare submitted. If appropriate bonds are not provided, no payment will be made.

D. The Procurement and Contracts and Office of Facilities and Property Management reserve the right towithhold issuance of a Notice to Proceed until all documents are received if they are uncertain of theContractor’s ability to obtain the required bonds.

E. Prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the State of Kansas shall not be liable for any expensesrelating to the bid or Contract, or any expenses related to their preparation.

1.17 CHANGE ORDERS:

A. Changes to the initial Contract are to be made by the Project Architect/Engineer with the approval of theowner and the Director of the Office of Facilities and Property Management.

1.18 LAWS AND REGULATIONS:

A. All applicable laws of the State of Kansas, municipal ordinances and rules and regulations of allauthorities having jurisdiction over construction of this Project shall apply to any Contract resulting froma bid on this Project as though herein written out in full.

1.19 PROJECT CLOSE OUT:

A. When the Contract is satisfactorily complete and authorized by the Owner and the Office of Facilitiesand Property Management, the Project Architect/Engineer will forward a formal Certificate of ProjectCompletion and an Affidavit of Contractor to the Contractor.

B. The contractor will sign the Certificate of Project Completion and sign/notarize the Affidavit of Contractorto certify that all debts and claims against this project have either been paid in full or otherwise satisfied.The contractor will forward both along with the final application for payment back to thearchitect/engineer.

1.20 PROJECT GUARANTEE:

A. The date of the Certificate of Project Completion shall be the starting date for the guarantee/warrantyperiod, unless partial occupancy requires an earlier date to be set. In that case the guarantee/warrantyperiod for work and equipment serving the occupied area shall begin on the date the Owner takes partialoccupancy of that portion of the project.

1.21 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION PRIOR TO BID DATE:

A. Should a bidder or a manufacturer’s representative wish to incorporate, in the base proposal, brands orproducts other than those named in the Specifications, he shall submit written request for substitutionapproval to the Project Architect/Engineer ten (10) calendar days prior to date proposals are due.Approved substitutions will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made inany other manner.

END OF DOCUMENT B


C - 1

FORM OF BID

DOCUMENT C - FORM OF BID PART 1 - GENERAL SUBMITTED BY: _________________________________________________________________________________________

NAME OF COMPANY (Please print or type) ATTACH CERTIFIED OR CASHIER'S CHECK HERE IF FURNISHED IN LIEU OF A BID BOND SUBMITTED TO: SUBMITTED FOR:

Richard Beattie, Director Procurement and Contracts Department of Administration 900 S.W. Jackson Street, Suite 451S Topeka, Kansas 66612

Department of Transportation

Gage Subarea Modification

Bldg. No.: 27600-14016

Topeka, Kansas

A-013861

Sir: In response to your Notice to Bidders and in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned herewith submits his offer to provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools of trades and labor, accessories, appliances, warranties and guarantees and to pay all royalties, fees, permits, licenses, applicable taxes insurances, haulage, storage, superintendency, overhead and profit necessary to complete the following construction work: BASE BID (LUMP SUM): For the referenced project and in accordance with the Construction Contract Documents as prepared by the Project Architect/Engineer for a total lump sum price of:

__________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________DOLLARS ($_______________________________________).

Base Bid Price shall be the sum of Parts A & B. Base Bid is broken down for funding purposes only. PART A New Construction, south of the fire wall. $____________________

PART B Renovation of existing office area, north of the fire wall. $____________________

ALTERNATE BIDS AND UNIT PRICES: The undersigned offers for the Owner's consideration and use the following prices for specific alternate bids and unit prices. These prices include all costs to the Owner, including those for labor, materials, equipment, tools of trades and labor, appliances, accessories, warranties, guarantees, royalties, fees, permits, licenses, applicable taxes, insurances, haulage, storage, superintendency, overhead and profit. Alternates are to be added to the above quoted base bid price as noted and may be a negative number. Bidders are advised that the Owner is not restricted to selecting Alternates in numerical order as listed below. The sole intent of this provision is to allow the agency maximum flexibility to incorporate enhancements into the project. Any change in the alternate and unit price listing will cause a new Form of Bid to be issued.


C - 2

FORM OF BID

ALTERNATE NO. 1 Ceiling in Open office space Room 111. ADD ($_________________)

ALTERNATE NO. 2 Lighting in Open office Room 111. ADD ($_________________)

ALTERNATE NO. 3 Remodel Existing Restrooms, Rooms 129

130, 131. ADD ($_________________)

ALTERNATE NO. 4 PEMB exterior metal panels. ADD ($_________________)

MAJOR SUBCONTRACTORS: The undersigned hereinafter identifies as part of this bid the major subcontractors he proposes to use in the performance of work under the contract. If the bidder will perform the work of a subcontractor with his own forces, he must so indicate by writing his company name in the space where the subcontractor would have been listed. If the choice of major subcontractors is dependent upon the combinations of alternates the owner elects to include as a part of the work, a separate sheet shall be attached to the Form of Bid designating the different combinations of such major subcontractors. No change or substitution may be made in the listed subcontractors without the prior approval of the Secretary of Administration. In order to obtain this approval a written request shall be made to the Director of the Office of Facilities and Property Management. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION (List one (1) only) __________________________________________________________________________________________

Name __________________________________________________________________________________________

Address ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION (List one (1) only) __________________________________________________________________________________________

Name __________________________________________________________________________________________

Address TIME OF COMPLETION: The undersigned agrees to have the work of the project to a point of final completion, including all punch list items, ready for the Project Architect/Engineer's final inspection and the Owner's and Office of Facilities and Property Management’s acceptance, in 330 Calendar days (or less) following issuance of the written Notice to Proceed. ADDENDA: The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: #1(_____) #2(_____) #3(_____) #4(_____) #5(_____) #None(_____)

STATE TAX: The undersigned attests this Bidder is not in arrears in taxes due the State of Kansas. This project has been determined by the Kansas Department of Revenue to be subject to Kansas sales tax. The cost of said Tax must be INCLUDED IN all Bid and Contract prices. Sales tax includes all applicable state, county and city sales taxes. (Refer to the Supplemental General Conditions, Document E, for instructions on paying the tax.)


C - 3

FORM OF BID

FEDERAL TAX: The undersigned has included in all quoted prices the cost of federal excise tax on all items of construction and equipment subject to said tax. AGREEMENTS: The undersigned agrees to the following terms and conditions: 1. An incomplete bid or other information not requested which is written on or attached to this Form of Bid, may

be cause for rejection of the bid.

2. For a bid to be considered responsive, every blank must be filled in. Failure to do so may result in the disqualification of the bid.

3. A bid may be considered incomplete and non-responsive that does not indicate a price for any alternate bid or unit price described and identified on the Form of Bid. A typed or printed "no bid" entered in the space provided for an alternate bid or unit price may lead to the bid being considered non-responsive and be grounds for rejection of the bid. A typed or printed "no charge" entered in the space provided for an alternate bid or unit price will be considered a valid bid, as will the figure "0.00."

4. He has read the Notice to Bidders and the Instructions to Bidders carefully.

5. The accompanying bid security (bond) (certified check) (cashier's check) in the amount of:

______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________ DOLLARS ($_______________________________________).

is payable without condition to the State of Kansas, the sum of which it is agreed will be forfeited as liquidated damages for the delay and extra expense caused the owner if the undersigned fails to execute the Contract and to furnish the bonds and insurances required by the Construction Contract Documents.

6. The Director, Procurement and Contracts reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive all technicalities should such action be deemed to be in the best interest of the State of Kansas.

7. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all alternate bids and unit prices. 8. Subject to the provisions of K.S.A.75-6901 et seq. this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30)

calendar days following the receipt, opening and public reading thereof. 9. Failure to acknowledge receipt of any addendum issued may be cause for a bid rejection. 10. Prior to the complete execution of a construction contract this project may be canceled at any time

by the State. Neither the State of Kansas nor any of its agencies, employees or agents shall be responsible for any bid preparation costs, or any costs or charges of any type, should all bids be rejected or the project canceled for any reason prior to the complete execution of a construction contract.

CERTIFICATION REGARDING IMMIGRATION REFORM & CONTROL

All Contractors are expected to comply with the Immigration and Reform Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), as may be amended from time to time. This Act, with certain limitations, requires the verification of the employment status of all individuals who were hired on or after November 6, 1986, by the Contractor as well as any subcontractor or sub-subcontractor. The usual method of verification is through the Employment Verification (I-9) Form. With the submission of this bid, the Contractor hereby certifies without exception that Contractor has complied with all federal and state laws relating to immigration and reform. Any misrepresentation in this regard or any employment of


C - 4

FORM OF BID

persons not authorized to work in the United States constitutes a material breach and, at the State’s option, may subject the contract to termination and any applicable damages. Contractor certifies that, should it be awarded a contract by the State, Contractor will comply with all applicable federal and state laws, standards, orders and regulations affecting a person’s participation and eligibility in any program or activity undertaken by the Contractor pursuant to this contract. Contractor further certifies that it will remain in compliance throughout the term of the contract. At the State’s request, Contractor is expected to produce to the State any documentation or other such evidence to verify Contractor’s compliance with any provision, duty, certification, or the like under the contract. Contractor agrees to include this Certification in contracts between itself and any subcontractors in connection with the services performed under this contract. By signing this Form of Bid, the Contractor agrees to follow the Immigration and Reform Control Act of 1986 and any and all amendments to the Act. DECLARATIONS:

The undersigned hereby declares he has carefully examined the Drawings and Specifications, has visited the actual location of the work, has satisfied himself as to all conditions and understands that, in signing this Form of Bid, he waives all right to plead any misunderstanding regarding same and agrees to be bound by the provisions of said Drawings and Specifications and all statements made therein. The undersigned proposes to enter into Contract and to furnish and pay for the specified bonds and other required documents within fifteen (15) working days after award of the contract. The undersigned certifies that he does not have any substantial conflict of interest sufficient to influence the bidding process on this bid. A conflict of substantial interest is one which a reasonable person would think would compromise the open competitive bid process. All bidders and major sub-contractors listed on the bid form shall not be in arrears in taxes due the state of Kansas.

1. All bidders and major sub-contractors listed on the Form of Bid must submit with their bid, current Certificate of Tax Clearance obtained from the Kansas Department of Revenue. Bidders and listed major sub-contractors can obtain the Certificate of Tax Clearance through the following website: http://www.ksrevenue.org/taxclearance.html .

2. Do not send Certificate of Tax Clearance in with Fax Modifications or as a Fax Modification. If not submitted with original bid all bidders and major sub-contractors will have 48 hours after bid openings to submit Certificate of Tax Clearance.

http://www.ksrevenue.org/taxclearance.html


C - 5

FORM OF BID

The undersigned attests this Bidder is not in arrears in taxes due the State of Kansas, has attached Kansas Department of Revenue Certificate of Tax Clearance for the Bidder and all major sub-contractors listed on the Form of Bid, and has attached signed State of Kansas - Tax Clearance Status forms from all listed major sub-contractors. SIGNATURE AND SEAL: DATED THIS ____________DAY OF __________________________________, 20____ .

__________________________________________________________

LEGAL NAME OF PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION

__________________________________________________________

FEDERAL EMPLOYEE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

__________________________________________________________

MAILING ADDRESS for the above

__________________________________________________________

CITY, STATE and ZIP CODE

______________________/____________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER

______________________/____________________________________

CELL PHONE NUMBER E-MAIL ADDRESS

___________________________________________________________

CONTACT PERSON FOR TAX ISSUES

If the bid is submitted

by a Corporation, affix seal here

______________________________/__________________________

BY (SIGNATURE) TITLE

BIDDER'S CONTRACTING IDENTIFICATION NUMBER: To help facilitate the awarding of the Contract and subsequent payment(s) processes, the bidder gives the FEIN (Federal Employers Identification Number) or the SSN (Social Security Number) planned for use when making application for partial or full work compensation. (Use space provided above.)

END OF DOCUMENT


D - 1

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENT D - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT DA-144 (3-1-01) ARTICLE INDEX 1. Definitions 2. Specifications and Drawings 3. Additional Instructions 4. Reference Standards 5. Surveys, Permits and Regulations 6. Shop Drawings and Samples 7. Materials and Workmanship 8. Allowances 9. Inspection and Testing of Materials 10. “Or Approved Substitute” Clause 11. Subsurface & Latent Conditions Found Different 12. Changes in Work 13. Separate Contracts 14. Subcontracts 15. Mutual Responsibility of Contractors 16. Project Architect/Engineer's Authority 17. Duties of the Contractor 18. Protection of Work and Property 19. Receiving and Storing Materials and Equipment 20. Safety 21. Correction of Work 22. Construction Schedule and Reports 23. Time for Completion

24. Right of Owner to Suspend Work 25. Right of Owner to Terminate Contract 26. Bonds 27. Substitute Bonds 28. Sales Tax 29. Quantities of Estimates 30. Payments to Contractor 31. Payments by Contractor 32. Subcontractor Payment Indemnification 33. Acceptance of Final Payment as Release 34. Use and Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 35. General Guarantee 36. Arbitration, Damages, and Warranties 37. Patents and Royalties 38. Indemnification 39. Assignments 40. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted 41. Kansas Acts Against Discrimination 42. Antitrust 43. Optional Performance and Payment Guarantee 44. Simultaneous Execution of Construction Contracts 45. Evaluations 46. Drug Testing 47. Licensure

1. DEFINITIONS The following terms as used in this contract are respectively defined as follows:

A. The term Project Architect/Engineer refers to the Project Architect/Engineer refers to an Architect/Engineer selected by a negotiating committee pursuant to K.S.A. 75-1253 and 75-1257, or any employee of the Department of Administration or a state agency authorized by K.S.A. 75-1254 to act as Project Architect/Engineer for the project.

B. As directed, rejected, approved, and other words of similar meaning which authorize any exercise of judgment, shall be distinctly understood to mean that such power to direct, reject, and approve shall be vested only in the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner, and the Office of Facilities and Property Management.

C. Construction documents are the detailed drawings, and specifications defining the scope of the work for the design of the project.

D. The construction representative or inspector is appointed by and responsible to the Office of Facilities and Property Management. He inspects capital improvement projects ensuring construction is in accordance with approved code footprints, building codes and accessibility laws.

E. Contract: The agreement between the Contractor and the Owner covering the work to be done.

F. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1. The Contract Documents, enumerated in the table of contents of this project manual shall form a part of this Contract and the provisions thereof shall be as binding upon the parties hereto as if they were fully set forth.


D - 2


2. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the proper execution of the Work.

3. Contract Documents consist of the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Bid, Contractor's Performance Bond, Contractor's Public Works Bond to the State, the Contract, General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Maps, Plats, etc., prepared or furnished by the Project Architect/Engineer, and Addenda, including additions and/or modifications therein incorporated before the execution of the Contract. Contract Documents shall also include written clarifications, Change Orders and written interpretations by the Project Architect/Engineer which are made after execution of the Contract which are not included in Change Orders.

G. The Contractor is a person, firm or corporation with whom the Contract is made by the Owner.

H. The Contractor's superintendent is the Contractor's chief representative at the Project site or related work area.

I. The Director is the head of the Office of Facilities and Property Management and, under certain delegated

authority, acts on behalf of the Secretary of Administration.

J. The Office of Facilities and Property Management is a unit of the Department of Administration of the State of Kansas authorized to administer, enforce or interpret laws relating to construction on state property.

K. Final Project Completion is the date upon which the Contractor shall be completed with all punch list items to the satisfaction of the Owner, Project Architect/Engineer and Office of Facilities and Property Management and all systems are fully tested, balanced, corrected and functional. Final completion is to occur on or before the adjusted contract completion date. It is at this point that the Contractor may apply for final payment of the contract sum at which point a Certificate of Project Completion shall be written.

L. The Owner is the State agency, representing the State of Kansas, with whom the agreement with the contractor is executed.

M. The Owner’s Representative is the person(s) appointed by and responsible to the Owner. He acts on behalf

of the Owner in matters relating to the execution of the contract.

N. Partial Occupancy (for phased projects only) is the date that a separate wing or portion of the building receives final completion as designated above.

O. Wherever the word "Plan" is used, the word "Drawing" may be substituted, and vice versa.

P. The Prime Contractor is that Contractor identified in the Contract to serve as coordinator and director of all

work when separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the project.

Q. The term "provide" shall be interpreted to mean, "furnish and install in place."

R. A Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. A lower-tier Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a contract with a Subcontractor or another lower-tier Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create contractual relationships between the Owner or the Project Architect/Engineer and any Subcontractor or lower-tier Subcontractor, of any tier.

S. Substantial completion is the point at which the Owner, Office of Facilities and Property Management, and the Project Architect/Engineer agree the work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete so that the Owner may occupy or use the premises for its intended purpose. Substantial completion will not occur until all items relating to fire exiting, notification, detection, separation or suppression on the fire code footprint of record are completed.

T. The term “supplier” also is applicable to those furnishing materials, equipment or supplies to be incorporated in the project whether work performed is at the site or in the factory, or both.

U. A suitable warehouse shall be approved by the Project Architect/Engineer, and Owner’s Representative and


D - 3


must comply with the following.

1. The facility shall be an independent, commercial warehouse not owned by the Contractor or Supplier.

2. The facility must have established material warehousing procedures.

3. The warehouse shall be located within an acceptable distance of the project site, as established by the Project Architect/Engineer, and Owner’s Representative.

4. The Project Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Representative shall be provided with all documentation required by Article 30 - Payments to Contractor.

5. All materials for the Owner’s project must be stored in the name of Owner.

V. Surety: Approved surety bound with and for the Contractor to insure his acceptable performance of the

Contract and for his payment of all obligations under the Contract.

W. The term "Work" includes all labor necessary to complete the construction required by the Contract Documents for this Contract, and all materials, equipment and supplies incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

X. Written notice will be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, if delivered at or sent by mail to the last business address shown to the party giving notice, or if transmitted via e-mail or facsimile to the e-mail address or facsimile number provided by the firm or entity.

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

A. These Specifications are of an abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall," “shall be," "as noted on the Drawings," "according to the Drawings," "a," "an," "the" and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as when "note" occurs on the Drawings.

B. Owner, Contractor, Project Architect/Engineer, are those mentioned as such in the Contract Documents. They are treated throughout the Contract Documents as if each were of singular number and masculine gender.

C. Specifications are separated into titled divisions for convenience of reference, and to facilitate letting of contracts and subcontracts. Such separations will not, however, operate to make the Project Architect/Engineer an arbiter to establish limits of subcontracts or to establish jurisdiction.

D. The drawings, herein referred to consist of drawings prepared by the Project Architect/Engineer and are identified and incorporated in these Contract Documents.

E. Drawings are intended to show general arrangements, design, and extent of work and are partly

diagrammatic. As such, they shall not be scaled.

F. Details take precedence over smaller scale general drawings.

G. In case of conflict between drawings and specifications, or between drawings and other drawings, the project

architect is to be contacted for clarifications.

H. Any specific provision in any of the Contract Documents which may be in conflict or inconsistent with any of the articles in these General Conditions or the Supplementary General Conditions shall be controlling for that specific project.

I. Should conflicts in Contract Documents occur, either in quality or quantity of work required, the Contractor shall, unless clarification has been issued by addenda prior to receipt of bids, furnish, and install work in accordance with either of the conflicting provisions of the documents as the Project Architect/Engineer may direct.


D - 4


J. If the Contractor observes that drawings and specifications are at variance with any laws, ordinance, rules, regulations, or codes applying to the Work, he shall promptly notify the Architect Owner, and Office of Facilities and Property Management in writing, and any necessary changes will be adjusted as provided in Contract Documents. However, it is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes, and regulations.

K. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complimentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results

L. Drawings consist of sheets enumerated in these Contract Documents and of such detailed drawings and instructions as will be provided during the progress of the Work, to fully explain and carry out the requirements of these specifications and the drawings.

M. Drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are and shall remain its property. They are not to be used on another project and, with the exception of one contract set for each party to the Contract, shall be returned to the Owner’s Representative on request, at the completion of the Work.

3. ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor may be furnished additional instructions, clarifications, and/or detail drawings by the Project Architect/Engineer as necessary to carry out the intent of the Work included in the Contract. The additional Drawings and/or instructions thus supplied will coordinate with the Contract Documents and will be so prepared that they can be reasonably interpreted as part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in accordance with the additional detail drawings and/or instructions.

4. REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or Federal standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified.

B. Obtain copy of standards when required by Contract Documents.

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Project Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. References to known Standard Specifications mean and intend the latest edition of said Specifications adopted and published as of the date of invitation to submit Bids. References to technical society, organization or body are made in the Specifications.

E. Codes, industry standards and guidelines referenced in the Contract Documents include but are not limited

to the following acronyms:

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines

ACI American Concrete Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

ANSI American National Standards Institute (all publications)

ARI American Refrigeration Institute

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

AWI Architectural Woodwork Industry

AWSC American Welding Society Code

CBM Certified Ballast Manufacture

FM/IRI Factory Mutual/Insurance Rating Institute

GCEHMF Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities

IBC International Building Code

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association


D - 5


IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IFC International Fire Code

IFGC International Fuel Gas Code

IMC International Mechanical Code

IPC International Plumbing Code

JCAHO Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations

Kansas Boiler Safety Act Rules and Regulations

LSC Life Safety Code

MRCA Midwest Roofing Contractors Association

NEC National Electrical Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NESC National Electrical Safety Code

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NIST National Institute of Standards & Technology

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

SMACNA Sheet Metal Air Conditioning National Association

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

5. SURVEYS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS

A. If additional site information is required beyond that shown in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for all site, topography and property surveys not provided.

B. The Contractor shall pay all fees and shall procure all applications, permits, licenses and approvals necessary

for the execution of his Contract. See K.S.A. 75-3741c.

C. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all State and Federal laws, codes, rules and regulations relating to the performance of the Work, the protection of adjacent property, and the maintenance of passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities.

D. If charges for water, sewer and other utility connections made by municipalities are costs which the State is obligated to pay, the Contractor shall pay these charges where required by the Specifications.

6. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

A. Shop drawings shall consist of drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, and which illustrate some portion of the work.

1. All shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter identifying the project and listing each item being submitted. Each item submitted shall be identified by reference to the Project identification number, Specifications number and/or Drawing sheet numbers.

2. Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect/Engineer a list of shop drawings and a tentative submittal

schedule prior to the first partial payment. Submittal schedule must be updated if requested.

3. All subcontractors, material or equipment suppliers shall submit through the Contractor shop drawing items comprising brochures, manufacturer's catalog sheets and data specifications. After the Project Architect/Engineer's approval, one (1) copy shall remain on file with the Project Architect/Engineer, one (1) copy shall be transmitted to the Office of Facilities and Property Management, one (1) copy shall be sent to the Owner, one (1) copy shall be kept on file in the Contractor's job. In addition to the distribution listed above, the contractor shall determine the number of additional copies required for construction use, including subcontractors and suppliers. Additional copies that may be required for the project shall be identified at the pre-construction conference. Contractor shall distribute the construction copies as required.

B. Samples shall consist of physical examples furnished by the Contractor in sufficient size and quantity to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Samples shall be submitted on items called for in the Specifications or as requested by the Project


D - 6


Architect/Engineer.

1. Submit samples in sufficient quantity to permit Project Architect/Engineer to make all necessary tests and of adequate size to show quality, type, color range, finish, and texture. Label each sample stating materials, type, color, thickness, size, project name, identification number, and Contractor's name.

2. Submit transmittal letter requesting approval, and prepay transportation charges to Architect/ Engineer's office on samples forwarded.

3. Materials installed shall match approved samples.

C. The Contractor shall review shop drawings and samples and shall place his stamp and/or signature thereon as evidence that he has checked each item, and shall submit same with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other Contractor. The Contractor shall inform the Project Architect/Engineer in writing of any deviation in the shop drawings or samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for all corresponding changes due to deviations in details, dimensions, and costs involved with other trades.

D. By stamping and submitting shop drawings and samples, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. Drawings not so noted will be returned without being examined by the Project Architect/Engineer.

E. The Project Architect/Engineer will review and approve shop drawings and samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Project Architect/Engineer's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions, nor shall the Project Architect/Engineer's approval relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or samples.

F. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Project Architect/Engineer and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples until approved. Resubmitted items shall be identified as such on the items and the transmittal letter.

G. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing on resubmitted shop drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Project Architect/Engineer on previous submissions. Corrections or changes indicated on shop drawings shall not be considered an extra work order.

H. No work requiring a shop drawing or sample submission shall be commenced until the submission has been approved by the Project Architect/Engineer. All such work shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings and samples.

I. The Contractor shall keep on the site of the Work, an approved or confirmed copy of the shop drawings, Drawings and Specifications, and shall at all times give the Owner access thereto.

J. All drawings for any one Contract should be numbered consecutively and shall bear the name, project identification number, and location of the project, the name of the Contractor, the date of the drawing, and the date of each correction or revision.

K. The Contractor submitting late, inadequate or incorrect shop drawings shall be responsible for damages and

delays should submittals be rejected by the Project Architect/Engineer.

7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials and fixtures shall be new and of latest design and current manufacture unless otherwise specified as approved by the Project Architect/Engineer. All Work shall be performed by competent workers and shall be of best quality.

B. The Contractor shall carefully examine the plans and specifications and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material, equipment, and apparatus into the building.

C. The Contractor shall base his bid only on the Contract Documents. Contractor may make a written proposal


D - 7


to the Project Architect/Engineer to use alternate materials or fixtures, but the Project Architect/Engineer’s decision shall be final. Refer to Article 10 - “Or Approved Substitute” Clause.

D. Should the Contract Documents fail to adequately describe materials or goods to be used, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to inquire of the Project Architect/Engineer what is to be used and to supply it at the Contractor’s expense or else thereafter replace it to the Project Architect/Engineer’s satisfaction. As a minimum, the Contractor shall provide the quality of materials as generally specified throughout the Contract Documents.

E. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test by the Project Architect/Engineer, the Construction Representative and the Owner’s Representative at any and all times during manufacture, installation, and construction on any of them, at places where such manufacture, installation, or construction is carried on. The Project Architect/Engineer shall have the authority and right to reject defective materials and workmanship or to require correction.

F. Materials prohibited by governmental authority or regulation from being used in construction shall not be used

on this project.

G. The Contractor shall promptly remove, at his expense, all rejected materials from work site.

H. When a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless:

1. Manufacturer cannot make satisfactory delivery, or

2. Material delivered fails to comply with contract requirements.

3. No change can be made without the Project Architect/Engineer’s approval

I. In order that ready availability of materials, parts, or components for repair, replacement, or expansion may be assured, all such materials, parts and components shall be obtained where feasible from sources which maintain a regular, domestic stock.

J. Reference to "standard" specifications of any association or manufacturer, or codes of State authorities, refers to the most recent printed edition or catalog in effect on the date which corresponds with date of the Contract Documents.

K. Whenever reference is made in the Specifications that work shall be "performed," "applied," "installed," "finished," "tested," or "connected," in accordance with the "manufacturer's directions or instruction," the Contractor to whom those instructions are directed shall furnish printed copies of such instructions when requested by the Project Architect/Engineer before execution of the work.

8. ALLOWANCES

A. The Contractor shall include in the contract sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:

1. These allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the

materials and equipment required by the allowance delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes;

2. The Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the contract sum and not in the allowance;

3. Whenever the cost is more than or less than the allowance, the contract sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize changes, if any, in handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses.

9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS


D - 8


A. All work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records shall be made available by the Contractor to authorized representatives and agents of State government.

B. If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Project Architect/Engineer’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it shall, if required in writing by the Project Architect/Engineer or the Owner’s Representative, be uncovered for the Architect’s observation and be replaced and recovered at the Contractor’s expense with the proper personnel in a timely manner as approved by the Owner, without change in the Contract Time.

C. If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect or the Owner’s Representative has not specifically requested to observe, prior to its being covered, the Project Architect/Engineer or the Owner’s Representative may request to see such Work, and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor who will furnish the necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner will be responsible for payment of such costs.

D. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall provide all testing as outlined in the Contract Documents by approved independent testing agencies. Copies of tests reports shall be sent to Office of Facilities and Property Management, the Owner, and the Project Architect/Engineer and the Contractor by the testing agency.

E. If any work is required to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Project Architect/Engineer, Construction Representative and the Owner’s Representative a minimum of five working days notice of date for such inspection. Such materials and equipment requiring testing, shall be tested in accordance with accepted or specified standards, as applicable. Unless otherwise called for in the Specifications, the laboratory or inspection agency shall be accepted by the Project Architect/Engineer and the Contractor will pay all costs incurred by the specified testing and laboratory procedures. Should retesting be required, due to failure of initial testing, the cost of such retesting shall be borne by the Contractor.

F. The cost of any testing performed by manufacturers or contractors for the purpose of substantiating acceptability of proposed substitution of materials and equipment, or the necessary conformance testing in conjunction with manufacturing processes or factory assemblage, shall be borne by the Contractor or manufacturer responsible.

G. On the basis of the test results, materials, equipment, or accessories may be rejected even though general approval has been given. If items have been incorporated in the Work, the Project Architect/Engineer will have the right to cause their removal and replacement, without cost to the Owner, by items meeting contract requirements or to demand and secure such reparation to the Owner from the Contractor as is equitable.

H. The Project Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to furnish a certificate guaranteeing that material or equipment as submitted complies with contract requirements. If statement originates with manufacturer, the Contractor shall endorse all claims and submit statement in his own name.

10. "OR APPROVED SUBSTITUTE” CLAUSE

A. Whenever, in the Contract Documents any article, appliance, device, or material is designated by the name of a manufacturer, vendor, or by any proprietary or trade name, the words “or approved substitute”, shall automatically follow and shall be implied unless specifically indicated otherwise. The standard products of manufacturers other than those specified will be accepted when, it is proven in writing via product literature to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer they are equal in design, spare parts availability, strength, durability, usefulness, serviceability, operation cost, maintenance cost, and convenience for the purpose intended. The written product literature shall include information to allow a complete comparison of the proposed product. Any changes required in the details and dimensions indicated in the Contract Documents for the substitution of standard products other than those called for shall be properly made and approved by the Project Architect/Engineer at the expense of the Contractor requesting the substitution or change. No substitutions will be permitted for components of extensions to existing systems when, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the named manufacturer must be provided in order to insure compatibility with the existing systems, including, but not limited to, fire alarms, smoke detectors, controls, etc.

B. No substitution shall be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Project Architect/Engineer's written approval. Requests for approval of substitutions must be made in a timely manner. (See applicable


D - 9


section of the “Instructions to Bidders”).

C. It shall be understood that the use of materials or equipment other than those specified, or approved substitute by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall constitute a violation of Contract, and that the Project Architect/Engineer shall have the right to require the removal of such materials or equipment and their replacement with the specified materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense.

D. Substitutions after the Award of Contract are not allowed.

11. SUBSURFACE AND LATENT CONDITIONS FOUND DIFFERENT

A. Should the Contractor encounter subsurface or latent conditions at the site materially differing from those indicated in the Contract Documents, he shall immediately stop work in the area where differing conditions are found and give notice to the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner, and Office of Facilities and Property Management, of such conditions before they are further disturbed. The Project Architect/Engineer will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions, and if he finds that they materially differ from those indicated in the Contract Documents, he will at once make such changes as he may find necessary, any increase or decrease of cost resulting from such changes to be adjusted in the manner provided in Article 12 - Changes in Work, of the General Conditions.

12. CHANGES IN WORK

A. No changes in the work covered by the Contract Documents shall be made without having such change executed in writing by Contract Change Order and approved by the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner, Director of Office of Facilities and Property Management and the Director of Accounts and Reports. Any change in the work performed by the Contractor without signed approval shall be done at the Contractor's expense.

B. In cases of emergency, or as needed to expedite the work in a timely manner, the Project Architect/Engineer may authorize, in writing, changes in, or additions to, Work to be performed or material to be furnished pursuant to the provisions of the Contract. These field orders shall be incorporated into formal Contract Change Orders at a later date.

C. Changes in the work covered by Contract Change Order include, but are not limited to: extension or reduction in project completion time, charges or credits resulting from changes in construction. A Change Order is the sole remedy for the contractor. No request may reserve the right to additional compensation or remedies related to work in the request regardless of any language to the contrary. Charges or credits to the contract sum for work covered by the approved change order shall be determined by one or more, or a combination of the following methods:

1. By an acceptable unit price or lump sum proposal from the Contractor and the Subcontractors of any tier. Proposal shall include all take-off sheets of each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier. Breakdowns shall include a listing of each item of material with unit prices and number of hours of labor for each task. Labor cost per hour shall identify the base labor rate and applicable fringe benefits plus associated expenses for social security, worker’s compensation, and federal and state unemployment.

2. By a cost-plus-fixed-fee (percentage) basis with maximum price, total cost not to exceed maximum specified.

3. By unit prices contained in the Contractor’s original proposal and incorporated in the Construction Contract. Unit prices contained in the Contractor’s original proposal are understood to include the Contractor’s overhead and profit. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of such unit prices to quantities of the Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or to the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

D. Overhead and profit on Change Orders shall be applied as follows:

1. The overhead and profit charged by the Contractor shall be considered to include, but not limited to, performance bond, builder’s risk and public liability insurance, job site office expense, incidental job supervision, field supervision, company benefits, general office overhead, and cost associated with the preparation of design documents, layout drawings, or shop drawings. The percentages for overhead and profit charged on Change Orders shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent,


D - 10


and complexity of the Work involved but in no case shall exceed the following:

OVERHEAD AND PROFIT FOR ADD CHANGE ORDERS

Overhead Profit Fee

To Contractor on work performed by other than his own forces:

0%

0%

10%

To First level subcontractor on work performed by his subcontractors:

0%

0%

10%

To Contractor and/or his sub-contractors for that portion of work performed with their respective forces:

10%

10%

0%

2. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the Contract, the application of overhead and profit shall be on the net change indirect cost for the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier performing the Work.

3. The percentages for overhead and profit credit to the Owner on Change Orders that are strictly decreases in the Quantity of work or material shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the Work involved.

E. No claim for an addition to the Contract sum will be valid unless authorized as aforesaid in writing by the Project Architect/Engineer. In the event that none of the foregoing methods are agreed upon, the Project Architect/Engineer may require the contractor to complete the work by force account. The cost of such Work will be determined by the Contractor’s actual labor and material cost to perform the work plus applicable overhead and profit as outlined above recorded on a daily basis. The Owner’s Representative and the Project Architect/Engineer will verify daily the Contractor’s time and material for the Work.

F. Any work completed by the Contractor outside the original project scope without written approval from the Project Architect/Engineer will be deemed as a waiver by the Contractor for additional compensation for said work.

G. The Owner will either accept or reject a change order within (14) calendar days after receipt of complete

change order pricing and documentation from the Contractor as outlined in this Article.

13. SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. When separate Contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work at the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the contractor who executes each separate Contract with the Owner. The term Prime Contractor shall mean that specific contractor established by the Contract to serve as coordinator and director of all work, and all contractors placed under the contractual authority of the prime contractor shall provide work for the project in accordance with the direction of the prime contractor. Failure to abide by this provision shall constitute a breach of Contract.

B. The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the project with his own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar conditions of the Contract. All contractors shall fully cooperate with each other and carefully fit the work to that provided under other contracts as may be directed by the Owner. It shall be the duty of each Contractor to whom Work may be awarded, as well as all Subcontractors of any tier employed by them, to communicate immediately with each other in order to schedule Work, locate storage facilities, etc., in a manner that will permit all Contractors to work in harmony in order that Work may be completed in the manner and within the time specified in the Contract Documents.

C. No Contractor shall delay another Contractor by neglecting to perform his work in the proper sequence. Each Contractor shall be required to coordinate his work with other Contractors so as to afford others reasonable opportunity for execution of their work. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work, including actual damages, if applicable, shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefore.

D. The Contractor shall not claim from the Owner money damages or extra compensation under this Contract when delayed in initiating or completing his performance hereunder, when the delay is caused by labor


D - 11


disputes, acts of God, or the failure of any other Contractor to complete his performance under any Contract with the Owner, where any such cause is beyond the Owner’s reasonable control.

E. Progress schedule of the Contractor for the Work shall be submitted to other Contractors as necessary to

permit coordinating their progress schedules.

14. SUBCONTRACTS

A. The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty subcontractors on those parts of the Work, under normal contracting practices, as performed by such subcontractors.

B. Unless otherwise required by these Contract Documents or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, within ten (10) days after the award of the Contract, shall furnish to the Project Architect/Engineer and the Director of Office of Facilities and Property Management in writing the names of the persons or entities proposed for each of the principal subcontracted portions of the work. The Contractor shall not award any work to any subcontractor found unqualified by the Project Architect/Engineer, Office of Facilities and Property Management, or the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.

D. Nothing contained in Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the Owner.

E. The Contractor, by written agreement, shall require each subcontractor, to the extent of the work to be performed by the subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of these Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these documents, assumes toward the Owner and the Project Architect/Engineer. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with his sub-subcontractors.

15. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS

A. If, through acts of neglect on the part of the Contractor, any other contractor or any subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, the Contractor agrees to promptly settle with such other contractor or subcontractor by agreement or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such other contractor or subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against any such claim.

16. PROJECT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY

A. The Project Architect/Engineer shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability and fitness of the several kinds of work and materials which are provided under this Contract and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work and the construction thereof. In case any question shall arise between the parties hereto relative to said Contract or Specifications, the determination or decision of the Project Architect/Engineer shall be a condition precedent to the right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for work under this Contract affected in any manner or to any extent by such question.

B. The Project Architect/Engineer shall decide the meaning and intent of any portion of the Contract Documents where the same may be found obscure or be in dispute. Any differences or conflicts in regard to their work which may arise between the Contractor under this Contract and other contractors performing work on this Project for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Project Architect/Engineer.

C. The Project Architect/Engineer shall provide responsible Construction Administration. After consultation with the Owner and Office of Facilities and Property Management he has authority to stop the Work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure proper execution of the Contract.

D. The Project Architect/Engineer is the interpreter of the conditions of the Contract and the judge of its performance; as such, he shall side neither with the Owner nor with the Contractor, but shall use his powers under the Contract to enforce its faithful performance by both.


D - 12


E. He shall, within a reasonable time, act on submittals and make decisions on all matters relating to the progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents.

F. The Project Architect/Engineer's decisions are subject to review by the Director of the Office of Facilities and

Property Management.

1. All claims must be brought to the attention of the Director within ten (10) days of the Project Architect/Engineer’s decision which is being reviewed. The Director or his designee shall meet with the Contractor and Project Architect/Engineer to hear the positions of both parties. The director may designate alternative procedures to receive and review the positions of the parties. If a negotiation committee was assembled to select the Project Architect/Engineer, the director may delegate the decision making power to those individuals. The director, his designee or the negotiating committee shall render a decision within thirty (30) days of the hearing.

17. DUTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, transportation, and superintendence, and coordination of subcontractors necessary to execute, complete, and deliver the work within the specified time. Whenever the Contract Documents indicate work to be performed by the Contractor, it shall mean at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Properly prepare all Work to receive subsequent Work or finish. Notify the Project Architect/Engineer if any Work is unsatisfactory to receive such subsequent Work or finish and receive his instructions before proceeding.

C. The Contractor shall supply sufficient and competent supervision and personnel, and sufficient material, plant, and equipment to prosecute the Work with diligence to insure completion thereof within the time specified in the Contract Documents, and shall pay when due any laborer, Subcontractor of any tier, or supplier.

D. The Contractor, if an individual, shall give the Work an adequate amount of personal supervision, and if a partnership or corporation or joint venture the Work shall be given an adequate amount of personal supervision by a partner or executive officer, as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

E. The Project Architect/Engineer, Office of Facilities and Property Management, and the Owner’s Representative shall, at all times, have access to the Work; and Contractors shall provide proper facilities for such access.

F. The Contractor and each of his Subcontractors of any tier shall submit to the Owner such schedules of quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records, and other data as the Owner may request concerning work performed or to be performed under the Contract.

G. The Contractor shall be represented at the site by a competent superintendent or foreman from the beginning of the Work until its final acceptance, unless otherwise permitted by the Owner’s Representative. The superintendent or foreman for the Contractor for the general building Work shall exercise general supervision over all Subcontractors of any tier engaged on the Work with decision making authority of the Contractor. It is understood that such representative shall be acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner, and the Office of Facilities and Property Management, and shall not be replaced without written permission before the project is completed unless he ceases to be on the Contractor's payroll. The superintendent shall be replaced upon request of the Owner.

H. The Contractor shall attend preconstruction conference with all of his appropriate subcontractors.

I. The Contractor shall attend all project meetings with all of his appropriate subcontractors.

J. The superintendent or foreman shall establish and maintain a permanent benchmark to which access may be had during the progress of the Work, shall give all lines and levels, and shall be responsible for the correctness of such. The contractor shall retain the services of a registered land surveyor for the project construction staking and layout if referenced in the Supplemental General Conditions.

K. No pleas as to act, orders or supervision of the Architect, the Owner, or any other person shall be admitted in justification of any errors in construction or departure from terms of the Contract, except for duly executed change orders, additional instructions or additional supplemental contracts, in writing, signed by the Owner.


D - 13


L. The Contractor shall be responsible for layout of his own work and for any damage which may occur to work of any other Contractor or subcontractors of any tier, because of errors or inaccuracies on the part of this Contractor and his Subcontractor of any tier as well as be responsible for unloading, uncrating, and handling of all materials and equipment to be erected or placed by him, whether furnished by the Contractor or others. The Contractor is further responsible that the layout of work by Subcontractors of any tier which shall be coordinated with layouts of all general construction Work and all other subcontract work. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative, salvage materials, waste, and scrap resulting from such work shall be promptly removed from the site by the Contractor, at his expense.

M. The Contractor shall limit operations and storage of materials to the area within the project limit lines shown on drawings, except as necessary to connect to existing utilities, shall not encroach on neighboring property, and shall exercise caution to prevent damage to existing structures.

N. The contractor shall follow procedures outlined below for all utility outages/tie-ins:

1. All shutting of valves, switches, etc. shall be in conjunction with or by the Owner’s personnel.

2. The Contractor shall request an outage/tie-in meeting at least two weeks before the outage/tie-in is

required.

3. The Owner’s Representative will schedule an outage/tie-in meeting at least one week prior to the outage/tie-in.

4. The following individuals shall attend this meeting:

(a) Owner’s Representative

(b) Contractor’s Superintendent

(c) Subcontractors of any tier performing the Work

5. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the following at this meeting:

(a) Date and time of proposed outage/tie-in.

(b) Detailed work plan to be followed during the outage and the total time required to complete all work.

(c) Work force to be employed during the outage.

(d) Owner and/or utility responsibilities during the outage.

(e) Contingency plan in case of complications (i.e., the availability of additional personnel and materials) during the outage.

6. The Contractor shall be aware that the outage/tie-in time and date is subject to approval by the Owner’s

Representative.

O. The Contractor shall coordinate all Work so there shall be no prolonged interruption of existing equipment and services. Any existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, or electrical disconnection necessary, which affect portions of this construction or building or any other building, must be scheduled with the Owner’s Representative to avoid any disruption of operation within the building under construction or other buildings or utilities. In no case shall utilities be left disconnected at the end of a work day or over a weekend. Any interruption of utilities, either intentionally or accidentally, shall not relieve the Contractor from repairing and restoring the utility to normal service. Repairs and restoration shall be made before the workers responsible for the repair and restoration leave the job.

P. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property referred to in this Article caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor of any tier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable, and for which the Contractor is responsible under this Article.


D - 14


Q. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection, including weather protection, and proper maintenance of all equipment and materials installed, or to be installed by him.

R. The Contractor shall be responsible for care of his finished Work and must protect same from damage or defacement until acceptance by Owner. All damaged or defaced work shall be repaired or replace to the Owner’s satisfaction, without cost to the Owner.

S. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable ordinances and regulations. The Contractor shall save the

Owner and the Project Architect/Engineer harmless as a result of any failure to do so.

T. Required Code inspections necessary for Occupancy

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the OFPM inspectors to schedule required code inspections. The agency and the project architect/engineer are to be informed of all scheduled required code inspections.

Code inspections (if component is included in the project) are required to be performed by OFPM prior to covering work. These inspections include but are not limited to:

1. Footings and Foundations 2. Underfloor/Under slab 3. MEP Underground (not associated with underfloor/under slab) 4. Framing 5. In-Wall 6. Fire-resistive assemblies and fire-resistant penetrations 7. Above Ceiling 8. Fire Alarm 9. Sprinkler and Standpipe 10. Emergency Lighting 11. Back-up Power Sources 12. Fire Pump 13. Elevator 14. Roof inspections (including tear-off, insulation, membrane placement, flashing) 15. Emergency Power 16. Smoke Control Systems 17. Pressure testing of all piping 18. Locking systems 19. Final Inspections (including exit path and ADAAG verification) (This information is also outlined on the Occupancy Checklist form located on our website at http://www.admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc).

The required code inspections shall be coordinated with OFPM inspector via individual cell telephones. Telephone contact is to be a minimum of 3 work days prior to anticipated inspection. Inspection confirmation may occur via e-mail after telephone coordination. Failure to coordinate a scheduled inspection with a minimum of 3 work days may result in no inspection and subsequent denial of a Certificate of Occupancy.

An Inspection Record will be issued by OFPM inspectors for each required inspection. The Inspection Record will indicate when the inspection is approved. If a deficiency is noted, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate solution of the deficiency with the Project Architect/Engineer and to correct all noted deficiencies as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Issuance of the Certificate of (Partial) Occupancy is dependent on resolution of all deficiencies. (Please note: The inspector, noted in Item 1 above, is to be notified of each required inspection. The inspector, at his discretion, may defer this inspection. The inspector will inform the contractor and agency representative regarding who will be performing the inspection.)

U. When requested by the Project Architect/Engineer, Construction Representative, and the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor, at no extra charge, shall provide a safe means for examination of work in progress or completed.

V. No project signs shall be erected without the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

http://www.admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc


D - 15


W. The Contractor shall verify all measurements. No extra charges or compensation will be allowed as a result of the failure to verify dimensions before ordering materials or fabricating items.

X. The Contractor shall provide, at the proper time, such material as required for support of the Work. If openings or chases are required, whether shown on drawings or not, the Contractor shall see they are properly constructed. If required openings or chases are omitted by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide them at the Contractors own expense, but only as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer.

Y. The Contractor shall maintain at his own cost and expense, adequate, safe and sufficient walkways, platforms, scaffolds, ladders, hoists, and all necessary, proper, and adequate equipment, apparatus, and appliances useful in carrying on the Work and to make the place of work safe and free from avoidable danger, and as may be required by safety provisions of applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and building and construction codes.

Z. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal of all rubbish, debris, and dirt resulting from the Work and shall clean up as requested by the Project Architect/Engineer, Construction Representative, and the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of clean-up and removal from premises. All debris resulting from said removal shall be disposed of off State owned property at an authorized dump site. The building and premises shall be kept clean, safe, in a workmanlike manner, and in compliance with OSHA standards at all times. At completion of Work, all dirt, stains, and smudges shall be removed from every part of the building, all glass in doors and windows shall be washed, and entire Work shall be left broom clean in a finished state ready for occupancy. The Contractor shall advise his Subcontractors of any tier of this provision, and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for leaving the premises in a finished state ready for use to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. In detention facility projects, the contractor shall return all security related shop drawings to the Owner.

AA. The Contractor shall accurately record on blue line prints all changes to the original plans made during the installation of the work. The Contractor shall also record all changes to the original specifications made during the installation of the work. The Contractor shall maintain an updated set of Record Documents (both drawings and specifications) at the job site throughout construction (if there is an on-site office). This set of Record Documents shall include all addenda, change orders, field revisions, changes, and alterations that occur during construction and shall be furnished, in good condition, to the Project Architect/Engineer prior to completion of the project.

BB. The Contractor shall establish and be responsible for wall and partition locations. Other Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier shall observe these locations and be responsible for setting their sleeves, openings, or chases.

CC. The Contractor for construction work shall pump, bail, or otherwise keep general excavations free of water. Subcontractors of any tier shall keep their individual excavations free of water in an approved manner. The Contractor shall keep all areas free of water before, during, and after concrete placement.

DD. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the work or to make its parts fit together properly.

EE. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and such separate contractor, such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

FF. The Contractor shall observe, comply with, and be subject to all terms, conditions, requirements, and limitations of the Contract Documents, and shall complete the entire Work to the extent of quality and workmanship implied by the Contract Documents and in a manner which will warrant acceptance by the Project Architect/Engineer, the Owner, and the Office of Facilities and Property Management.

GG. Contractors and Subcontractors employed upon Work shall be required to conform to labor and employment laws of the State of Kansas and various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto and to other laws, ordinances and legal requirements applicable thereto.

HH. The Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct of Contractor's employees and the employees of subcontractors and suppliers on the work site. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy any


D - 16


activity which may be construed as discriminatory or which creates a hostile work environment. Activities covered by this provision include, but shall not be limited to, signs or language that are vulgar, profane or racially or sexually derogatory.

II. The contractor shall inspect the building and complete deficiencies before the Project Architect/Engineer’s final inspection in order to avoid long and multiple punch lists. The building shall be cleaned before the final inspection to allow all defects to be noticed at the final inspection and reduce late additions to the punch list.

18. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. In the event of temporary suspension of work, or during inclement weather, or whenever the Project Architect/Engineer shall direct, the Contractor shall, and shall cause his subcontractors to carefully protect his and their work and materials against damage from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, any work or materials that have been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any of his subcontractors to protect the work, such materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall at all times safely guard the Owner's property from damage or loss in connection with his Contract. He shall at all times safely guard and protect his own work, and that of adjacent property, from damage. The Contractor shall replace or make good any such damage or loss unless such be caused directly by errors contained in the Contract Documents, or by the Owner, or his duly authorized representative.

C. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or damage of property, or safety of life, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Project Architect/Engineer, in a diligent manner. He shall notify the Project Architect/Engineer promptly thereafter. Any claim for compensation by the Contractor due to such extra work shall be promptly submitted to the Project Architect/Engineer for approval as provided for in Article 12 - Changes in Work, herein.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for all damage to building, walks, pavement, steps, plantings, lawns and any other property which is caused by construction activity. Any such damage shall be corrected by repair or replacement as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer and in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

E. Transport, handle, store and erect materials in a manner to keep them free from damage.

F. Support no runways, ramps or construction equipment on or transport over any items or assemblies subject

to displacement, disfigurement or other damage.

G. Protect Work in place which requires job-finishing until said finishing has been completed.

H. Protect previously placed Work with suitable coverings or other protections during installation of subsequent Work. Remove any foreign materials from surfaces, and then clean same immediately with materials that will not damage finished Work (brick, aluminum, etc.) to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer.

19. RECEIVING AND STORING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Upon receipt of materials and equipment at the job site or another authorized point of delivery, Contractor shall have an authorized person present to check all items for in-transit damage and to make arrangements to replace any damaged materials or equipment in ample time to prevent delay to its scheduled installation.

B. At the point of receipt of materials and equipment, the Contractor shall have sufficient experienced personnel

present to unload all items and prepare and locate them for proper storage prior to their installation.

C. Wherever possible, deliver materials and equipment in manufacturers' original crates, boxes or packages, keeping identifying labels intact until installation and final acceptance and cleaning. Where items are to be job-assembled, label, tag, mark or otherwise properly identify each component part until incorporated in the Work.

D. Provide waterproof, well-ventilated enclosures for storage of materials and equipment subject to damage by

dampness, frost, freezing, etc. Location for said enclosures shall be where approved by the Owner.

E. Storage of materials and equipment outside on pallets with any type of covering material over them will not be allowed, unless permission to do so has been documented in writing by the Architect or Engineer.


D - 17


F. Remove from the premises and replace with new, any materials and equipment determined, in writing, by the Project Architect/Engineer to be in any condition not acceptable for use on the Project.

20. SAFETY

A. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner’s Representative and Architect.

B. Precaution shall be exercised at all times for the protection of persons (including employees) and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws and building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment and hazardous conditions shall be guarded, including warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations, and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities or eliminated in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, published by the Associated General Contractors of America; and Occupational Safety and Health Standards, published by Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor; or their successor publications., latest and best edition, amendments or addenda.

C. All contractors/suppliers hereby agree to comply with all applicable occupational safety, health and environmental laws, regulations, standards, codes and/or ordinances at all times from inception through completion of this Contract. This includes, but is not limited to, the Hazard Communication Standard under the Occupational Safety and Health Act (for information and free assistance, contact the Kansas Department of Labor, Division of Industrial Safety and Health, 512 S.W. 6th Street, Topeka, Kansas 66603-3150, telephone 913-296-4386); and the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (for information and free assistance, contact the Kansas Department of Health and Environment Right-to-Know Program, 109 S.W. 9th Street, Suite 501, Topeka, Kansas 66612-1290, telephone (785-296-1690).

D. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of authorities having jurisdiction bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

E. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all persons while on the construction site. The Contractor shall maintain construction area safety which may include providing and maintaining warning signs, lights, signal devices, barricades, guard rails, fences, and other devices appropriately located on site which shall give proper and understandable warning to all persons of danger, entry onto land, structure, or equipment as required by code and all other regulatory requirements.

G. If the Contractor encounters on the site, material believed to be hazardous which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Architect and Contractor if in fact the material is hazardous and has not been rendered harmless. Hazardous materials are those as defined by Kansas Department of Health and Environment’s response list.

H. The Contractor shall promptly take precautions which are necessary and adequate against conditions created during the progress of the Contractor’s activities hereunder which involve a risk of bodily harm to persons or a risk of damage to property. The Contractor shall continuously inspect Work, materials, and equipment to discover any such hazardous conditions and shall be solely responsible for correction of any such conditions.

I. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to enforce or direct safety rules or procedures. It shall not

be the responsibility of the Owner or Project Architect/Engineer to enforce or direct safety rules or procedure.

J. Contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Owner and Project Architect/Engineer from damages and expenses from any and all claims related to this Article for bodily injury or property damage or expenses incurred by any person or firm.

K. The Contractor shall properly execute the work before proceeding to the next step in sequence so as not to

endanger the safety of all persons while on the construction site.


D - 18


21. CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Project Architect/Engineer for failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after final completion. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Project Architect/Engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby.

B. The Contractor shall remove from the site, at his expense portions of the Work which are not in accordance

with the requirements of the Contract Documents and not accepted by the Project Architect/Engineer.

C. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the Owner may, after ten (10) days written notice from the Project Architect/Engineer to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost of the Project Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such Change Order shall not require the approval of the Contractor.

D. The Contractor and his surety shall be and remain liable to the Owner for any excess cost or damages occasioned to the Owner as the result of the actions set forth in this Article.

E. If the Project Architect/Engineer accepts Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be adjusted as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be made whether or not final payment has been made.

22. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND REPORTS

A. At the Pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall present to the Project Architect/Engineer a construction schedule and a Schedule of Values. The Contractor (or designated prime contractor) shall coordinate each contractor's or subcontractor's schedule and establish a mutually acceptable schedule for the entire progress of the Work and shall deliver the schedule to the Project Architect/Engineer in a form satisfactory to the Office of Facilities and Property Management and the Owner. Schedule shall be coordinated with and approved by the Project Architect/Engineer, the Owner, and Office of Facilities and Property Management.

B. Include in the construction schedule the number of allowed adverse weather days as noted in Document E, Article 50 of this manual.

C. The construction progress schedule shall include as a minimum the following detail:

1. The proposed schedule for tasks identified in the Schedule of Values in bar chart form.

2. Important milestones which may impact the construction progress schedule shall be identified by a critical path schedule using either bar chart or the Critical Path Method. Projects with construction costs below $250,000 shall require a bar chart schedule. Projects with construction costs above $250,000 shall require both a bar chart schedule and a Critical Path Method schedule.

3. Anticipated monthly payments for the duration of the project by the Owner based on the rate of progress proposed by the Contractor upon request.

4. Submission dates of all details and shop drawings.

5. Procurement and delivery dates for all equipment and material.

6. Weekly breakdown of work and activities for each major component of work. Define special items as

directed by the Project Architect/Engineer.

7. Intended time for starting and completing each activity including indication of float time.

D. There will be no payment of any periodic estimate until the Contractor’s list of Material Suppliers, Construction

Progress Schedule, and Schedule of Values have been approved by the Project Architect/Engineer.


D - 19


E. The construction progress schedule shall be maintained current at all times by the Contractor (or the designated prime contractor). Revisions shall be made in the same detail as the original and shall be accompanied by written explanation of the reasons for the revision and shall be subject to the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. Copies of the revised construction progress schedule shall be delivered to the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner, and the Office of Facilities and Property Management monthly during the course of the Work.

F. The Contractor (or designated prime contractor) shall submit monthly to the Project Architect/Engineer progress reports showing actual percentage of each activity completed, estimated future progress and anticipated completion time of such activity.

G. Should the Contractor fail to meet completion dates required by the progress schedule, the Owner's representative may issue a written notice to the Contractor requiring the Contractor to submit a written plan for expediting the Work to comply with the progress schedule. The plan shall be submitted to the owner's representative within ten (10) days after the Contractor's receipt of such notice. The Contractor's plan shall specify the dates and means by which the Contractor will bring the work back on schedule. Means may include, but are not limited to, hiring additional workers, working additional hours, utilizing additional equipment, or expediting delivery of materials. If the Contractor fails to submit a written plan or fails to comply with dates specified in the plan for bringing the Work back on schedule, the owner's representative may, by written notice, require that additional workers, plant and equipment be placed on the Work or require that hours, in addition to regular hours, be worked until progress is as scheduled, with no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall immediately implement requirements of the notice.

23. TIME FOR COMPLETION

A. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the Work, described in the Contract is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industry conditions prevailing in this locality. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the time for completion is measured by calendar days, not work days.

B. If the Contractor’s schedule provides for an earlier completion date than the established contract completion date, and the agency desires to change the contract completion date to the earlier date, this may be done through a change order to the contract. This change order does not require the approval of the Contractor.

C. Except in cases of emergency or by agreement or instruction of the Project Architect/Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall not knowingly, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance as required to be furnished by the Contractor, and by the effective date of the Notice to Proceed.

D. The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Final Completion within the time specified on Contract Documents. A delay in the delivery to the site of any materials or equipment will not be considered as a valid reason for a time extension to the Contract.

E. At the end of the time for completion, all equipment and systems shall be fully operational and functioning as required by the specifications. Testing shall be completed and all defects discovered as a result of this testing shall be corrected before the completion date.

F. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this Contract. These are not compensable delays. Time extensions, only if they impact the progress of the Work in a negative manner, may be granted if the delay is due:

1. To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including, but not limited to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes or embargoes. For weather delays, see (G) below.

2. To any delays of subcontractors or suppliers occasioned by any of the causes specified in subsection 1) of this article.


D - 20


3. The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days from the beginning of such delay, notify the Project Architect/Engineer, in writing, of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain the facts and extent of the delay and notify the Contractor within a reasonable time of his decision in the matter.

G. Claims for delay due to “unusually severe weather” affecting the completion time shall only be considered when meeting the following criteria:

1. Definitions:

(a) “Adverse weather” – weather conditions during a definite time and place that are unfavorable to

construction activities.

(b) “Unusually severe weather” – weather that is more severe than the “adverse weather” anticipated for the season at the location of the construction project.

2. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather to be anticipated for the project location during any given month.

3. The delay must be related to the unusually severe weather and not due to the Contractor’s fault, negligence, or his failure to maintain the approved construction schedule.

4. The unusually severe weather must cause actual delay to the completion time of the project. A claim for unusually severe weather delay must document actual delay to a scheduled critical path construction activity for at least 50% or more of the Contractor’s scheduled workday. On projects without critical path scheduling, the Owner may withhold final determination of the delay claim until the Contractor submits an updated construction schedule for approval.

5. Anticipated “adverse weather” days. The Contract includes and anticipates that adverse weather conditions, including rain, snow, wind and extreme temperatures, will occur during the period of the Contract and will delay the Work. The schedule of monthly anticipated “adverse weather” delay days shall be incorporated in the “Time of Completion” for the project.

6. To meet the criteria for an unusually adverse weather delay day, one of more or the following requirements must be met within the work day and cause and delay a scheduled critical path construction activity, as noted in G4 above.

(a) Rainfall equal to or greater than 0.10 inches.

(b) Average temperatures less than 20 degrees Fahrenheit.

(c) Snowfall in excess of 1.0 inches.

(d) Sustained wind speed in excess of 25 mph.

7. Evaluation of a claim for delay caused by unusually severe weather shall be as follows:

(a) Claims for delay shall be submitted no later than ten (10) days after the end of the month to be

evaluated.

(b) The Contractor shall submit documentation indicating cause, affect and delay including the weather criteria on each adverse weather delay day that occurred during the month to be evaluated. Any day that is submitted that does not meet the criteria shall be deemed not to qualify as an adverse weather delay day.

(c) Documentation of adverse weather criteria shall be submitted in their original form from a recognized weather recording station, newspaper, computer information service, or other Owner approved source. In the event there is no weather recording source at or near the project location, the contractor shall record the daily weather information in a format meeting the criteria in G6 above. The weather documentation source will be determined at the pre-construction meeting.

(d) In order to calculate the delay from the supplied tables, deduct the number of anticipated adverse

weather delay days listed for the month being evaluated.


D - 21


(e) If the monthly total of qualifying adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather delay days, the net difference in qualifying delay days will constitute unusually severe weather. The number of qualifying delay days will be added to the Contract as an adjustment to the “Time of Completion”. There shall be no change in the Contract amount for this type of claim.

H. Acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, that will cause delay to this Contractor, shall be brought to the attention of the Project Architect/Engineer in writing within ten (10) calendar days. Failure to notify the Project Architect/Engineer immediately will cause the Contractor to waive his right to extra days or damages therefrom.

I. Permitting the Work or any part of it to continue after the time fixed for its completion, or after the date to which the time for completion may have been extended, shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the Owner of any of his rights under the Contract.

J. Liquidated damages are prescribed in Document E, Article 49 - Liquidated Damages, and are hereby agreed

to by all parties.

K. The Contractor, and any of its subcontractors, suppliers, material men or any other such party, shall have no claim for monetary compensation, monetary claims, or damages, of whatever kind or nature, for delay, hindrance, or inefficiency. The Contractor’s only claim and the Contractor’s only remedy for such delay, hindrance or inefficiency shall be for an extension of time as provided in Article 23 unless the claim is the result of (a) a negligent act, error or omission of the Project Architect/Engineer; (b) an unforeseeable site condition materially differing from that shown in the construction documents; or, (c) a negligent act or omission or breach of contract by the Owner. In these cases the Contractor shall receive compensation as provided in Article 12 - Changes in the Work.

L. At such time as the Contractor believes the project to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall notify the Project Architect/Engineer and request an inspection. The Project Architect/Engineer shall conduct an inspection and prepare a list of all items that have not been completed (if the Project Architect/Engineer determines that the construction is not complete and ready for the inspection, he shall so inform the Contractor). The Contractor shall complete all the items listed by the Project Architect/Engineer before the adjusted completion date in the contract (contract completion date with change orders adjustments). Upon completion of all such items, the Contractor shall request a final inspection which shall be conducted by the Project Architect/Engineer.

M. If the Project Architect/Engineer determines that any of the items listed have not been completed by the adjusted completion date of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of the additional Project Architect/Engineer’s services beyond the adjusted completion date of the contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the cost of any additional inspections if the failure to complete listed items is caused by the Project Architect/Engineer or Owner. Such costs shall be covered by a change order and shall be paid to the Project Architect/Engineer. Such change order shall not require the approval of the Contractor.

24. RIGHT OF OWNER TO SUSPEND CONTRACT

A. The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work in

whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

B. An adjustment will be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract caused by suspension, delay or interruption. No adjustment will be made to the extent:

1. that performance is, was, or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause

for which the Contractor in whole or in part is responsible, or

2. that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract.

C. Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with the work either before or after the start of construction by reason of any litigation, act of God, or other reason beyond the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to make or assert claim for damage by reason of said delay; but time for completion of work will be extended to such reasonable time as the Owner may determine will compensate for time lost by such delay; such determination to be set forth in writing. The Contractor will not be required to hold his bid price for longer than three months. The Owner may either negotiate a Change Order with the


D - 22


Contractor for any additional costs, or terminate the Contract following the three-month period. Should the Contract be terminated, the Contractor will be compensated for all work performed to date on the Contract.

25. RIGHT OF OWNER TO TERMINATE CONTRACT - CAUSE AND CONVENIENCE

A. In the event that any of the provisions of this Contract are violated by the Contractor, or by any of his subcontractors, the Director of the Office of Facilities and Property Management, on behalf of the Secretary of Administration, may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the surety of their intention to terminate the Contract for cause. Such notice shall contain the reasons for such intention, and unless within ten (10) days after the serving of such notice upon the Contractor, such violation or delay shall cease and satisfactory arrangement or correction be made the Contract shall upon expiration of said ten (10) days, cease and terminate.

B. In the event of any such termination for cause the Director of the Office of Facilities and Property Management shall immediately serve notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor, and the surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract, provided, however, that if the Surety does not commence performance thereof within ten (10) days from the date of the mailing to such surety of notice of termination, the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion by Contract at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable to the Owner for any excess cost above the original Contract amount occasioned the Owner thereby. In such event, the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the Work, such materials, appliances and plant as may be on the site of the Work and necessary therefore.

C. The Director of the Office of Facilities and Property Management, on behalf of the Secretary of Administration may, at any time, terminate the contract for convenience and without cause. Upon service of written notice the contractor shall:

1. cease operations as directed by the Director in the notice,

2. take actions necessary or as directed in the notice for the protection and preservation of the Work, and

3. except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts or purchase orders.

D. All materials previously paid for by the Owner shall be delivered to or remain on the construction site.

E. In case of termination for convenience the contractor shall be entitled to payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed, not to exceed 10% for each.

26. BONDS

A. A Performance Bond shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price as security for the faithful performance of this Contract and as security for the payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. Bonds are to cover all claims discovered during construction or prior to the end of the warranty period.

B. A Public Works Bond as required by K.S.A. 60-1111 shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price and shall be filed with the Clerk of the District Court in the county where the Project is being constructed. A Public Works Bond is not required for projects with a contract price below $100,000.

C. Bonds shall be issued by a surety company authorized by Kansas law and returned within 15 calendar days.

27. SUBSTITUTE BONDS

A. If at any time the Owner for justifiable cause, shall become dissatisfied with the surety bound by the Performance and Public Works Bond, the Contractor shall within fifteen (15) days after notice from the Owner so do to, substitute an acceptable bond in such form and sum and signed by such other surety as may be satisfactory to the Owner.


D - 23


B. No further payments shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety shall have furnished such an acceptable bond to the Owner.

C. The credit due on premiums for unused portion of canceled bond shall be applied to premiums on the

substitute bond and the difference for remaining premium cost will be paid by the Owner.

28. SALES TAXES

A. If the project is exempt, the Owner will secure a project exemption certificate for the project in accordance with the rules of Kansas Department of Revenue. The Contractor shall refer to the Form of Bid and Supplemental General Conditions to determine the tax exemption status of the project.

B. If the project is tax exempt, the Owner shall obtain a project exemption certificate, and furnish a copy of the same to the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the project exemption certificate to all suppliers from whom purchases are made, and to all subcontractors. Suppliers who supply materials for the project shall execute invoices covering the same bearing the project number from such certificate. Upon completion of the Project, each Contractor, and each Subcontractor who used the project exemption certificate to claim exemption, shall furnish to the Owner a sworn statement, on a form provided by the Director of Taxation, that all its purchases made exempt under the project exemption certificate were entitled to exemption. All invoices shall be held by the Contractor and Subcontractors for a period of five (5) years and shall be subject to audit.

C. If a project is not exempt, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall pay all sales tax required by law on labor and materials purchased to perform the contract. The Contractor shall include in his bid all such sales tax that is required to be paid on the material and labor needed to perform the contract. The type of project, the status of its owner, and the existence of a project exemption certificate will determine whether the contractor and subcontractor are required to pay sales tax on labor or material or are exempted for paying tax on labor or material or on both.

29. QUANTITIES OF ESTIMATES

A. Wherever the estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under this Contract are shown in any of the documents including the proposal, they are given for use in comparing bids and the right is especially reserved to increase or diminish them as they may be deemed reasonably necessary or desirable to complete the Work contemplated by this Contract, and such increase or diminution shall in no way vitiate this Contract, nor shall any such increase or diminution give cause for claims or liability for damages.

30. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR

A. The Owner will make partial payments to the Contractor for the value, proportionate to the amount of the Contract, of all labor and material incorporated in the work during the preceding calendar month upon receipt of certification from the Project Architect/Engineer and approval of the Owner and the Office of Facilities and Property Management. No payment will be made to the Contractor until Procurement and Contracts has received all documentation required to be submitted by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect/Engineer a request for certification for each payment, on current AIA documents G702 and G703. Contractors shall be responsible for securing their own AIA forms. Each item identified on the Schedule of Values shall be broken down into material and labor as separate items on the G703. This request for certification shall be submitted in the number of copies directed, and shall include the Contractor's detailed estimate of all items and activities of work to be performed, in the space provided on the form. If requested, the statement shall be supported by such evidence as may be required, showing the Contractor's right to the payment claimed.

1. Project architect/engineer will review, approve and forward undisputed requests to the Owner within

seven (7) days of receipt.

C. Periodic estimates of Work completed shall be correlated with the schedule of values and furnished to the Project Architect/Engineer with requests for partial payment.

D. Request for payment for preparatory work and materials delivered and suitably stored at the site to be incorporated into the work at some future period, will be given due consideration. The Project Architect/Engineer may, under certain circumstances, approve payment up to ninety percent (90%) of the value of manufactured products delivered to a suitable warehouse at or near the locale of the project. Stored products shall be insured to one hundred percent (100%) of their value. Proof of said insurance shall be


D - 24


given to the Project Architect/Engineer. A bill of sale and their costs, including an itemized inventory of all stored products, shall be obtained and provided the Project Architect/Engineer. Approval of the surety company of the Contractor shall also be obtained and provided to the Project Architect/Engineer before these items are stored. Insurance for stored materials shall include transportation from the warehouse to the job site.

E. Payments by the Owner will be due within thirty (30) days after receipt of certified request for payment from the Project Architect/Engineer.

F. Ten percent (10%) of the Work Completed to Date will be retained on each payment request until final

completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract.

1. Upon 50% completion, the Office of Facilities and Property Management, Owner and Project Architect/Engineer may reduce retainage to a minimum of 5% of the total project cost upon the following conditions:

(a) Reduction of retainage is not automatic. Any reduction must be requested. Approval may be withheld for a variety of reasons, to include progress not on schedule, concerns about quality of work, etc. Applications for payment that assume a reduction before it is approved will be returned for correction, thus delaying payment.

(b) Retainage of 10% is mandatory if the critical path progress of the work is not on schedule, including previously agreed upon change order days. If retainage had been reduced on previous applications for payment, and work falls behind the critical path schedule, retainage will revert back to the full 10% of the total invoiced cost to date on all applications until the work is back on schedule.

2. Retainage will be released on any undisputed payment within thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion of the project. When a subcontractor continues to work on the project after Substantial Completion, the Owner may withhold that portion of the retainage attributed to the subcontractor until thirty (30) days after the work is completed.

G. All material and work covered by partial payments shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the care and adequate protection from weather, damage, vandalism, theft, and fire of materials and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work, or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the Contract.

H. If overpayment occurs, the Owner has the right to stop payment applications until the actual Work completed is equal to the payment applications and certified by the Project Architect/Engineer to be in compliance with the contract documents.

I. Final payment will be made within thirty (30) days after final completion of the work.

J. Prior to the issuance of final payment, the Contractor shall submit a certification that all debts and claims

against this project have either been paid in full or otherwise satisfied in the form of an Affidavit of Contractor.

K. No recourse shall be had against any individual employee or agents of the State of Kansas, or officer thereof, for any payment under the contract or any claim based thereon.

31. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall pay within seven (7) days of receipt of payment from the Owner, each subcontractor out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of each subcontractor’s work, the amount to which said subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on account of each subcontractor’s work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each subcontractor, require each subcontractor to make payments to his sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

32. SUBCONTRACTOR PAYMENT INDEMNIFICATION

A. The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material suppliers, and furnishers of


D - 25


machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.

33. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT AS RELEASE

A. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from:

1. unsettled liens

2. faulty or defective work appearing after Final Project Completion

3. failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or

4. terms of any special guarantees or warranties required by the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled.

34. USE AND OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

A. If the construction schedule is current, the Contractor agrees to the Owner’s use and occupancy of a portion

or unit of the Project before the date of final completion, provided:

1. The Owner assumes all costs for maintenance of heat, electricity and water, and provides custodial care and maintenance of the occupied portions.

2. The Owner accepts all work as fully complete within that portion or unit of the Project to be occupied,

at time of occupancy.

B. If the Construction schedule is not current, the Contractor agrees to the Owner’s use and occupancy of all or a portion of the project:

1. Contractor is responsible for completing scheduled Work as noted on inspection report listing any incomplete work and Work as defined in the Contract Documents.

2. Contractor is responsible for cleaning up dust and debris caused by work completed in the occupied

areas.

3. Contractor is responsible for a final clean-up in all areas where occupancy has occurred prior to final completion.

35. GENERAL GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall remedy and make good all defective workmanship and materials and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom, which appear within a period of one year from the date of final project completion, providing such defects are not clearly due to abuse or misuse by Owner. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. The one (1) year period will not apply to defective workmanship and materials not discovered within the one year period.

B. Neither the final certificate for payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any expressed warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.

C. The guarantee on all work covered under this contract shall begin on the date of Final Project Completion or substantial completion if applicable. If the building is partially occupied, the date of partial occupancy shall establish the beginning date for the guarantee period for that section of the building and for all equipment in place, operable and used for this area. Any additional work in this area shall be considered warranty work by the Contractor.

D. Where guarantees or warranties are required in sections of specifications for periods in excess of one year, such longer terms shall apply.


D - 26


E. Within nine months after official acceptance of a Project, the Owner, the Contractor, the Project Architect/Engineer and the Office of Facilities and Property Management shall conduct a full inspection of the completed project and the Contractor shall promptly correct all items noted.

F. If, within one year after the date of Final Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found not to be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Project Architect/Engineer to do so unless the Project Architect/Engineer has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.

G. Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of time period of one year as described in this Article relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time with which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the his obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

36. ARBITRATION, DAMAGES AND WARRANTIES

A. Notwithstanding any language to the contrary, no interpretation of this Contract shall be allowed to find the State or any agency thereof has agreed to binding arbitration, the payment of damages or penalties upon the occurrence of a contingency, or to permit disclaimer of any or all warranties.

37. PATENTS AND ROYALTIES

A. The Contractor shall pay all royalty and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent or copyright rights and shall hold the Owner, its officers, agents and employees and the Project Architect/Engineer harmless from all loss and expense on account thereof.

B. If the Contractor uses any item covered by a patent or trademark, he shall reach an agreement with the holder of the patent or copyright.

38. INDEMNIFICATION

A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Project Architect/Engineer and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense 1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and 2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this paragraph.

B. In any and all claims against the Owner or the Project Architect/Engineer or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

C. The obligations of the Contractor shall not extend to the liability of the Project Architect/Engineer, his agents or employees, arising out of 1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or 2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Project Architect/Engineer his agents or employees provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

39. ASSIGNMENTS

A. The Contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of this Contract or any moneys due or to become due hereunder without written consent of the Owner; Office of Facilities and Property Management; Director of


D - 27


Procurement and Contracts and the Director of Accounts and Reports. In case the Contractor assigns all or any part of any moneys due or to become due under this Contract, the instrument of assignment shall contain a clause substantially to the effect that it is agreed that the right of the assignee in and to any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor shall be subject to prior claims of all persons, firms and corporations for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in this Contract.

B. Such assignment shall not be made without the consent of the surety unless the surety has waived its right to notice of assignment.

40. REQUIRED PROVISIONS DEEMED INSERTED

A. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.

41. KANSAS ACTS AGAINST DISCRIMINATION

A. The Contractor hereby agrees and covenants as a condition of the Contract that he will comply with the Kansas Act Against Discrimination, (K.S.A. 44-1001 et seq.) and the Kansas Age Discrimination in Employment Act (K.S.A. 44-1111 et seq.) and the Americans With Disabilities Act (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.), and that his failure to do so may be deemed to be a breach of Contract and may subject the Contract to be terminated.

42. ANTITRUST

A. For good cause, and as consideration for executing this Contract, the Contractor, acting herein by and through its authorized agent, hereby conveys, sells, assigns and transfers to the State of Kansas all right, title and interest in and to all causes of action it may now or hereafter acquire under the antitrust laws of the United States and the State of Kansas pursuant to this Contract.

43. OPTIONAL PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor may elect to use a certificate of deposit as a performance and payment guarantee in lieu of providing a Performance Bond and Public Works Bond. The certificate of deposit shall have a value of not less than the amount of the Contract, and shall serve the purpose of the Performance and Public Works Bonds as defined in Articles 26 and 27 of the General Conditions of the Contract.

B. The Director of Procurement and Contracts may accept a certificate of deposit payable to the State of Kansas, without condition, in lieu of any required surety bond from a bidder or contractor in the case of any contract for construction, repairs or improvements under K.S.A. 75-3739, 75-3741 or 60-1111 and amendments thereto.

C. The certificate of deposit shall be subject to forfeiture to the State of Kansas and shall be in a form and under such conditions as may be prescribed by the Director of Procurement and Contracts for surety bonds in accordance with K.S.A. 60-1112 and amendments thereto.

D. Each such certificate of deposit shall be retained by the State for at least six (6) months after the final acceptance of the work for which the contract was entered into. At the end of such time period, the certificate of deposit may be endorsed back to the Contractor if there are no claims by the State under the Contract or by any person making a claim against the certificate of deposit.

E. All interest accruing under any such certificate of deposit shall belong to the contractor unless the certificate of deposit is forfeited to the State of Kansas.

44. SIMULTANEOUS EXECUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

A. In order to expedite the processing of Construction Contracts, bidders agree to the simultaneous execution of a copy of this document by all parties. After the execution of their copy of the agreement, the parties shall submit them to the State of Kansas, Procurement and Contracts, for assembly and may make a copy for their files if they wish. Upon receipt of all executed copies, and the submittal of the required bonds and insurance certificates, Procurement and Contracts shall date and assemble the copies and it shall constitute a binding


D - 28


agreement as of the date of assembly. The assembled copies shall be retained in Procurement and Contracts, and a fully-executed set of contracts shall be delivered to the Contractor and State agency.

B. It is further agreed that if any party wishes to change any part of the Contract, they shall notify the Procurement and Contracts prior to signature. Procurement and Contracts shall review the request and if the changes are acceptable, a new contract shall be prepared and resubmitted to all parties for their signatures and processing as mentioned above.

45. EVALUATION

A. Bidders are advised that if awarded the Project, their performance will be evaluated by the Office of Facilities and Property Management with input from the State agency for whom the project is completed. This evaluation will remain on file and will be considered before the award of future projects. The Contractor, upon request, may receive a copy of the evaluations and prepare a response to the same. Responses will also be kept on file and considered in the same manner as the evaluations.

46. DRUG TESTING

A. Bidders are advised that in some circumstances federal regulations require drug testing of employees who install or maintain pipelines. Bidders should determine if drug testing is required on this project and include in its bid the complete cost for all such testing. Questions concerning these requirements should be directed to the Kansas Corporation Commission, Natural Gas Operations, 1500 S.W. Arrowhead Road, Topeka, Kansas 66604-4027, (785) 271-3100.

47. LICENSURE

A. All plumbing, electrical and heating, ventilation and air conditioning work on the job site shall be performed or supervised by a journeyman, with a current license in that particular trade. Licenses shall be available for inspection at the work site, and if a license is not available, work of that particular trade shall cease. Licenses from any state or political subdivision will be recognized. Licenses that require passage of Block/Experion tests are preferable.

END OF DOCUMENT D


E - 1

SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

DOCUMENT E - SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SALES TAX DETERMINATION

A. Article 28 of the General Conditions shall be supplemented as follows:

1. This project has been determined by the Kansas Department of Revenue to be subject to Kansas sales tax. The cost of said Tax must be INCLUDED IN all Bid and Contract prices. Sales tax includes all applicable state, county and city sales taxes.

a. A general contractor or other contractor who contracts directly with the state of Kansas or one of its agencies shall pay tax as follows:

(1) Labor: No tax will be assessed since the labor is purchased directly by the State or one of its agencies.

(2) Materials: Taxes will be assessed on material purchased for the project.

b. A subcontractor on this project shall pay tax as follows:

(1) Labor: Taxes will be assessed because this labor is not purchased directly by the state or one of its agencies. (However, labor will not be taxed on projects calling for the original construction of a building or for repair or remodeling of a residence.)

(2) Materials: Taxes will be assessed on materials purchased for the project.

c. Whether sales tax should be paid to the Department of Revenue by a subcontractor on the subcontractor's labor services will depend upon whether the project qualifies as the original construction of a building or facility or as the repair or remodeling of a residence. The contractor and each subcontractor will be responsible for determining whether labor services for the project qualifies for such exemption and for including the correct amount of state, county and city sales tax applicable to this project. Contractors and subcontractors must include all sales tax due on materials, which are not exempt on this project. Any questions should be addressed to the Kansas Department of Revenue, Division of Taxation, Taxpayer Assistance Center, (785) 368-8222.

2. A general contractor or other contractor that contracts directly with the State of Kansas shall obtain copies of the Kansas Retailers Sales Tax Registration certificates from all its subcontractors on this project and have them available at the jobsite upon request.

1.2 ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS

A. The following Articles are additional or modified conditions of the construction contract:

1. Article 48. Insurance.

2. Article 49. Liquidated Damages.

3. Article 50. Weather Day Data.

48. INSURANCE

A. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until the Contractor has obtained all the insurance required under this Article and such insurance has been approved by the Owner under the terms of this agreement. The Contractor shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on the subcontract until the insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved.

Companies providing insurance coverage must be authorized to transact the business of insurance in Kansas as an authorized insurer or eligible "non-admitted" insurer in accordance with K.S.A. 40-214 and K.S.A. 40-246e, respectively. Automobile liability and workers compensation insurance coverage


E - 2


must be obtained from insurers that are "authorized" to transact the business of insurance in Kansas pursuant to K.S.A. 40-3103 and K.S.A. 44-532, respectively.

B. The Contractor shall procure and maintain at its expense, from the date of the Contractor's receipt of a Notice to Proceed until acceptance of the entire work by the Owner, the following insurance:

1. Worker's compensation insurance for the Contractor, all partners and employees working on the project. The Contractor shall require all subcontractors to provide workmen's compensation for themselves, their partners and employees to be engaged in such work unless the subcontractor's employees are covered by the Contractor's workers' compensation coverage. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall include employer’s liability coverage with a one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) limit for each accident; disease-policy limit; and disease-each employee limit.

2. Commercial general liability insurance, in an amount not less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage, a general aggregate of one million dollars and a products-completed operations aggregate of one million dollars ($1,000,000). Commercial general liability shall include the following coverages: operations; broad form property damage; completed operations; independent contractors and contractual.

3. Automobile liability insurance in an amount not less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) for bodily injury and for property damage combined. Said coverage shall cover all owned, non-owned or hired vehicles of the contractor.

C. Scope of insurance and special hazards: The insurance provided under paragraph B above shall provide protection for the Contractor and his subcontractors against damage claims which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and also against any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of work under this Contract such as but not limited to: blasting, explosion, collapse, underground, rigging and hoisting, railroad protective, elevators and hoists.

D. Special form builder's risk: For this project, the principal contractor shall procure and maintain special form builder's risk insurance to include theft to protect the mutual interest of the owner and the contractor in an amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price. No other contractor is required to carry the special form builder's insurance on this project. The insurance is to apply from the contractor's receipt of a Notice to Proceed until acceptance of the entire work by the owner.

E. The principal Contractor's property coverage shall name the Owner and all contractors and/or subcontractors performing work on the project as additional insureds.

F. The principal Contractor's general liability coverage (excluding professional liability) shall name the Owner and Project Architect/Engineer on the project as additional insureds.

G. Subcontractors' insurance: The contractor shall either (1) require each of his subcontractors to procure and maintain during the life of his subcontract commercial general liability insurance, and automobile liability insurance of the type and in the same amount specified in the preceding paragraphs; or (2) insure the activities of his subcontractors in his own policies.

H. Proof of insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates showing the types, amounts, special coverages, effective dates and dates of expiration of policies. Such certificates shall provide the insurance company endeavor to give thirty (30) days notice of policy cancellation to the certificate holder.

49. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. The Owner shall be entitled to liquidated damages to cover the costs of alternate facilities, extra observation, the salaries of contingent forces and other expenses incurred by the Owner due to delays in completion of the work caused by the Contractor.

Liquidated damages shall be assessed in an amount per day as indicated below for each calendar day between the adjusted contract completion date and the date of substantial completion of the project. After substantial completion if final project completion is not achieved prior to the adjusted contract completion date the Contractor shall pay for the Project Architect/Engineer’s services; see Document D,


E - 3


Article 23 M. The above amounts shall be deducted from the contract by contract change order prior to final payment. Such change order will not require approval of the Contractor.

B. Liquidated damages are established at the rate of Two Hundred Fifty ($250.00) Dollars per calendar day.

50. WEATHER DAY DATA

A. The following table indicates the number of weather days assumed for the area of the state in which this project is being completed. Reference Document D, Article 22 and Article 23 for further information concerning weather days and scheduling.

WEATHER ZONE 3 Counties included in this zone are:

Anderson Coffey Geary Lyon Nemaha Riley Brown Douglas Jackson Marshall Osage Shawnee Chase Franklin Jefferson Morris Pottawatomie Wabaunsee

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY DAYS

January 5 days May 11 days September 7 days February 5 days June 9 days October 6 days March 8 days July 8 days November 5 days April 10 days August 7 days December 5 days

END OF DOCUMENT E


F - 1 FORM OF CONTRACT

DOCUMENT F - FORM OF CONTRACT (DA-141A)


F - 2 FORM OF CONTRACT


G - 1 FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND

DOCUMENT G - FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND

PERFORMANCE BOND We, ______________________________________________________________________________________

as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and _________________________, a corporation organized under the laws of

the State of __________________, with its home office in the city and state of _______________________, as Surety and

hereinafter referred to as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the State of Kansas, as Obligee, hereinafter called the

State, in the sum of _____________________ dollars ($_________________) for the payment of which sum we as

Contractor and Surety bind ourselves and our legal representatives and successors, jointly and severally, by this instrument.

WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated ___________________________, 201_____, entered in to a

contract with the State of Kansas for

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

in accordance with plans and specifications set forth in the State of Kansas, project #____________________ and RFQ

#____________, and which Contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.

IT IS THEREFORE the condition of the above obligation that whenever Contractor shall be in default and is declared by the State to be in default under the Contract, the State having performed the State’s obligations under the Contract, the Surety will promptly remedy the default by completion of the Contract and correction of defective work in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract. This includes repairs required by the guarantees and warranties called for in the Contract. It also includes additional legal, design professional, delay costs and liquidated damages resulting from the Contractor's default. The Surety waives notice of any change, including changes of time to complete the Contract. If surety does not promptly remedy the default, the Surety shall be liable to the State for funds sufficient to pay the cost of completion and other obligations in the above paragraph, less the balance of the contract price. Balance of contract price shall mean total amount payable by the State to Contractor under the Contract, less amounts previously paid to Contractor by the State. If Contractor faithfully, promptly and accurately completes the Contract and complies with all the conditions thereof, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands this ________ day of __________________, 201_____. Principal ___________________________________ By: ___________________________________ (Title) Surety ___________________________________ __________________________________________ (Kansas Resident Agent - if required) Address ___________________________________ Address ___________________________________ By: ___________________________________ (Attorney in Fact)

Name Address


H - 1 FORM OF PUBLIC WORKS BOND

DOCUMENT H - FORM OF PUBLIC WORKS BOND

CONTRACTOR’S PUBLIC WORKS BOND TO THE STATE (Pursuant to K.S.A. 60-1111 as amended)

We, _______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________, as Principal,

and _____________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the STATE OF KANSAS, in the sum of ____________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________DOLLARS,

well and truly to be paid, to which payment we hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors or

assigns, jointly and severally.

The condition of the above obligation is that the Principal and Surety agree to pay all indebtedness incurred for labor,

materials, equipment or supplies furnished in the performance of the construction contract by the contractor and his

subcontractors for the following public building or improvement,

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

in accordance with plans and specifications of Project No. ____________ on file in the Department of Administration, Office

of Facilities and Property Management. The surety waives notice of any change, including changes of time to complete the

contract.

NOW, THEREFORE, if the said contractor and all sub-contractors, if any, of said contractor shall pay all indebtedness

incurred for labor furnished, materials, equipment or supplies used or consumed in connection with, or in or about the

construction of said public building or making said public improvements, then the above obligation shall be void, otherwise it

shall remain in full force and effect.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, We have hereunto set our hands this ________ day of _________________, 201____ .

Principal: __________________________________

By: __________________________________

__________________________________

Surety: __________________________________

By: __________________________________

__________________________________

Name

Address

(Title)


I - 1 FORM OF APPOINTMENT OF SERVICE AGENT

DOCUMENT I - FORM OF APPOINTMENT OF SERVICE AGENT

Office of the Secretary of State / Corporations Division

Appointment of Service Agent (Note: Nonresident contractors under K.S.A. 16-113 who are foreign corporations, foreign limited partnerships or foreign

limited liability companies qualified to do business and in good standing in Kansas are not required to file this form.)

1. ______________________________________________________

(Name of individual, partnership, association or corporation)

hereby appoints for three years:

______________________________________________________

(Name of service agent--must be Kansas resident)

as agent for service of process pursuant to K.S.A. 60-306.

2. The address of the service agent in Kansas is:

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

(Street address or rural route)

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

(City) (County) (Zip code)

3. In testimony whereof, I _________________________________________________, of said entity, hereunto

subscribe my name this ______________ day of _____________________, A.D. 201___.

_____________________________________________

(Signature)

State of __________________________________

County of _________________________________

Acknowledged before me this ____________ day of _______________________, 201__.

My appointment or commission expires ____________________________.

Affix an impression of notary’s seal here:

_____________________________________________

(Notary’s Signature)

ss.

Form

S1

Do not write in this space

Please submit this document, properly notarized with $20 filing fee, to:

Secretary of State, Corporation Division, 1st Floor, Memorial Hall,

120 SW 10th Ave. Topeka, Kansas 66612; (785) 296-4564.


01 0000 - 1 STATE OF KANSAS REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 0000 – STATE OF KANSAS REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 OVERVIEW

A. In case of conflicts between the State of Kansas information (Document A through Document I and

Section 01 0000) and the technical specifications provided by the design team, the State of Kansas information prevails.

1.1 CONTACT INFORMATION FOR THE OFFICE OF FACILITIES MANAGEMENT

1. USPS: Office of Facilities and Property Management, Design, Construction & Compliance, Department of Administration, 700 Harrison Street, Suite 1200, Topeka, Kansas 66603.

2. Shipping address (via courier): Office of Facilities and Property Management, Design,

Construction & Compliance, Department of Administration, 700 Harrison Street, Suite 1200, Topeka, Kansas 66603.

3. Electronically: Visit our website at http://admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc. 4. Telephonically: (785) 296-8899.

1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The successful Bidder shall agree to attend a pre-construction conference along with persons responsible for the various operations involved with the Project.

1.3 COORDINATION WITH OWNER

A. The Owner will make the necessary arrangements to cause the Work area to be available to the Contractor. Access and egress to the Work area shall be routes prescribed by the Owner.

B. The prospective Bidder shall visit the site and ascertain the extent of the Work to be done under the Contract and the conditions under which it must be performed.

C. The prospective Bidder shall make his own estimates and verify all dimensions of areas on the job.

D. The prospective Bidder shall familiarize himself with the traffic regulations and parking and storage areas he will become involved with if he becomes the Contractor. The Contractor shall inform his workmen of these regulations and conditions. Parking and storage areas shall be as designated by the Owner.

E. Contact Steve Baalman, Metro Engineer, Kansas Department of Transportation, 101 SW Gage Blvd, Topeka, Kansas 66606 at telephone number 785-296-1768, e-mail address [email protected], for assistance in exploring the area(s) of Work.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Construction progress meetings will be held at the project site at a minimum, every 30 days, (monthly) while construction is on-going unless otherwise directed by the project architect/engineer. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. These meetings are mandatory.

1.5 CERTIFICATE OF PROJECT COMPLETION

A. Upon final completion of the work under the Contract, a formal Certificate of Project Completion will be forwarded to the Contractor by the Architect/Engineer. The date of the certificate shall be the starting date of the guarantee or warranty period for all guarantees or warranties.

http://admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc


01 0000 - 2 STATE OF KANSAS REQUIREMENTS

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Bind operation and maintenance data in 8-1/2" x 11" text pages.

B. Binder covers shall have printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," "title of project" and "project number."

C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. If required by the agency, submit one (1) hard copy of the operation and maintenance data, in a 3-ring binder to the Owner/agency.

E. One (1) electronic copy of the paper submission, on a flash drive, shall accompany the hard copy.

1.7 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST

A. The document below is for use by the project architect/engineer, contractor and Owner to verify all items related to final completion are provided before final payment is released to the contractor.

END OF SECTION 01 0000

PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST CONTRACTOR MUST HAVE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS COMPLETED AND APPROVED TO RECEIVE FINAL PAYMENT.

Check when complete or write NA in the blank if not applicable

____ Punchlist items ____ All warranties and instructions have been delivered to the Owner. ____ All keys have been delivered to the Owner. ____ All maintenance equipment and tools have been delivered to the Owner. ____ All extra materials and spare parts have been delivered to the Owner. ____ Certificate of (Partial) Occupancy ____ If Commissioning is the responsibility of the contractor, it has been completed and commissioning report has

been delivered to the Architect/Engineer. ____ If Testing and Balance is the responsibility of the contractor, approved reports have been completed and

delivered to the Architect/Engineer. ____ In projects which have security related design elements, the architect and engineer shall return all security

related shop drawings to the Owner. ____ O and M manuals have been delivered to the project Architect/Engineer, have been reviewed for

completeness and have been delivered to the Owner. ____ Training and demonstrations of as required by the specifications has been completed. ____ Record Documents have been delivered to the project Architect/Engineer. (Reference Document D – General

Conditions of the Contract Article 17 paragraph AA) ____ Final Cleaning has occurred to the satisfaction of the Owner and project Architect/Engineer. ____ Certificate of Occupancy executed by the Office of Facilities and Property Management is on file. A copy of this form shall be submitted to OFPM along with the Affidavit of Contractor & Certificate of Project Completion.


01 10 00-1 SUMMARY

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Access to site. 7. Coordination with occupants. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification and drawing conventions. 10. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: KDOT Gage Subarea Modification

B. Project Location: 101 SW Gage Blvd, Topeka, KS 66606

C. Agency: Kansas Department of Transportation

1. Owner's Representative: Steve A. Baalman, P.E., [email protected], 785.296.1768

D. Architect: Angela Haden The Clark Enersen Partners 2020 Baltimore Ave, Suite 300 Kansas City, MO 64108 816-474-8237

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:


01 10 00-2 SUMMARY

1. The project will be a partial renovation of the existing KDOT Subarea and new construction. The project also includes the new construction of garage and office areas

2. The renovated spaces include offices and open office. 3. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. Asbestos abatement will be completed for the first floor (TBD if the timing of remediation is concurrent with this contract).

B. Concurrent Work: Owner retains the right to perform construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Lateral file cabinets in Filing / Work Area (under the Plam countertop in contract).

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas indicated on drawings. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas and entrances serving

premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.


01 10 00-3 SUMMARY

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Notice to Proceed to Start until completion of project: On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: As agreed with Owner – owner requests no weekend work. 2. Early Morning Hours: As agreed with Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As agreed with Owner 4. Hours for Core Drilling and sawing: As required for schedule. Coordinate with owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than three 3 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Architect's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.


01 10 00-4 SUMMARY

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than three 3 days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Architect's] written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 30 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00


01 23 00- 1 ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


01 23 00- 2 ALTERNATES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 01: Ceiling in Open office space Room 111.

1. Base Bid: 2”x2” APC, as shown in drawings 2. Add Alternate: 2”x6” APC clouds with classic trim, as shown in drawings

B. Alternate No. 02: Lighting in Open office Room 111.

1. Base Bid: 2x2 Lay-in - troffer 2. Add Alternate: Indirect/Direct pendent lights

C. Alternate No. 03: Remodel Existing Restrooms, Rooms 129 130, 131

1. Base Bid: Existing Restrooms will remove existing ceiling, lighting, and exhaust. New 2x2 APC ceiling, new lighting, and new exhaust as shown in drawings.

2. Add Alternate: Remodel existing restrooms as shown in drawings. Remove drywall at walls, remove existing flooring, and remove existing plumbing fixtures. Add new cement board and tile on walls, new flooring, and new plumbing fixtures.

D. Alternate No. 04: PEMB exterior metal panels

1. Base Bid: Exposed fastener Metal Panel Type, reference Specifications and Drawings. 2. Add Alternate: Concealed fastener Metal Panel Type, reference Specifications and Drawings.



01 25 00-1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:

a. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

b. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit one copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.



e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

2. Architect’s Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fourteen (14) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.



h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

i. The specified product of method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.




01 26 00-1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710 “Architect’s Supplemental Instructions.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Architect/Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and The Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Mark-up percentage for all changes in the work shall not exceed 10%. e. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

f. Quotation Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.


01 26 00-2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Mark-up percentage for all changes in the work shall not exceed 10%. 6. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

7. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

8. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner’s approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form provided by Owner (DCC form 460).

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





01 29 00-1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor’s construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Include line item for record documents.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. DCC project number d. Architect's project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.



2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for

each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five (5) percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.



B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner (DCC form 450) for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual and can be downloaded from admin.ks.gov/offices/ofpm/dcc/f-and-d.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.



H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Copies of building permits. 5. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the

Work. 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 7. Performance and payment bonds. 8. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

3. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 4. List of incomplete Work of Substantial Completion.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Submit Form 560 – Project Closeout Checklist.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of

Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.





01 31 00-1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.



1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.



1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate clear space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to

be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm

locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control

center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.



8. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in a form acceptable to the Architect.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect’s response for each RFI.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.



2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Prepare log in accordance with regular progress meetings.

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Contractor is responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned including Owner, and Architect, within 5 days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction at a time convenient to Owner and Architect but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Contractor to conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, use DCC Form 430 – Pre-construction conference Agenda. Including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.



k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Contractor responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: xxxx



D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of substantial completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:



a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection

for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final

payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals to be determined.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes.



17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.





01 33 00-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered.



f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect’s Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals unless specifically requested and approved by Architect.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an agreement acceptable to Architect.

c. Refer to Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” for additional information on digital data files.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Organize and submit by Specification Section number. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and

related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial

submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 4. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section

as separate packages under separate transmittals. 5. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing

will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Submit 3 complete copies of all submittals after final approval for owners use per Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to

record Contractor’s review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect.



d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with specification section, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor’s review and approval markings

and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect

containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor’s letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.



1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect’s action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Keep and organize three paper copies of each approved submittal after review of each specification section is complete for owner. Turn over all submittals to owner at completion of project per Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

3. Informational Submittals: Keep and organize three paper copies of each approved submittal after

review of each specification section is complete for owner. Turn over all submittals to owner at completion of project per Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity

responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency.



f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.



a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. Refer to individual sections for detailed requirements.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.



N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.



1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data and other required submittals, submit certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A. Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



01 40 00-1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.



G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.



1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.



13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,

if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.



F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be

employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.



2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.

Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.



H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.



1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



01 45 23-1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS TESTING

SECTION 01 45 23 – SPECIAL INSPECTIONS TESTING

Where applicable, the permit applicant shall submit a statement of special inspections prepared by the registered design professional in responsible charge as a condition for permit issuance, in compliance with Chapter 17 of the 2018 International Building Code. The special inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence to the satisfaction of the building official for inspection of the particular type construction or operation requiring special inspection.

Instructions: Pg. 2 Statement of Special Inspection: The statement of Special Inspection must show the project name and location, the Owner and Contractor’s name, and the name of the design professional in responsible charge, as well as indicating the frequency that the special inspection reports will be submitted to the Building Official. The design professional must sign and seal the statement of special inspections, as well as the property owner. Pg. 3 Schedule of Inspection and Testing Agencies: The Schedule of Inspection and Testing Agencies must show all of the types of inspections that pertain to the project. It must also show the various inspectors that will be performing the inspections, their contact information, and certification. The design professional in responsible charge must list all qualifications or certifications that the inspection agencies possess. Pg. 4 Qualifications of Inspectors and Testing Technicians: Provided is a list of some of the most common certifications required to perform various special inspections. Use these certifications as applicable, to identify the certifications or qualifications of the inspection and testing agencies. Pg. 5 Final Report of Special Inspections: When all required special inspections on the project are complete, a Final Report of Special Inspections must be submitted to the building official. This report must show the project name, location, Owner, Owner’s address, and the Architect and Engineer of record. It must list any inspection issues that were not resolved and any specific concerns. The final report must be signed by the special inspector or his/her agent, and be signed and sealed by the design professional in responsible charge. Pgs. 6 Required Verification and Inspection of Steel Construction Provided is a complete list of required special inspections as prescribed in the International Building Code. Review the list, and below Scheduled Inspection Frequency indicate all required inspections that pertain to the specific project. Indicate whether the inspections to be performed are to be continuous inspections or periodic inspections.



Statement of Special Inspections Project: Location: Owner: Contractor: Design Professional in Responsible Charge: Firm: This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special Inspection and Structural Testing Requirements of the Building Code. It includes a schedule of Special Inspection services applicable to this project as well as the name of the Special Inspection Coordinator and the identity of other approved agencies to be retained for conducting these inspections and tests. The Special Inspection Coordinator shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities. Interim reports shall be submitted to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. Interim reports shall be submitted: weekly bi-weekly monthly other A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections, testing and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. Job site safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. This Statement of Special Inspections was prepared by: Type or print name Signature Date Owner’s Authorization Signature Date

Schedule of Inspection and Testing Agencies

Design Professional Seal



This Statement of Special Inspections includes the following building systems:

Cast-In-Place Concrete Architectural Systems Other:_________________________

Identify the special inspection or testing agencies to be used on this project.

Firm Name Address Phone # or Email Certification

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Note: The inspectors and testing agencies shall be engaged by the Owner or the Owner’s Agent, and not by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose work is to be inspected or tested. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official prior to commencing work.

Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance All pre-manufactured materials or components used for the construction of the building shall be inspected by an approved special inspector, or shall be manufactured on the premises of a fabricator that is registered and approved to perform such work without special instructions. Identify all fabricators that will be supplying materials or components to this project, and indicate whether the product was inspected by an approved special inspector, or the manufacturer is an approved fabricator. List all applicable certifications.

Firm Name Address Factory Inspected

Approved Fabricator

Certification

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.



Qualifications of Inspectors and Testing Technicians The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection and testing activities are subject to the approval of the Building Official. The credentials of all inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided if requested. Key for Minimum Qualifications of Inspection Agents: When the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge deems it appropriate that the individual performing a stipulated test or inspection have a specific certification or license as indicated below, such designation shall appear below the Agency # on the schedule of special inspectors. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Certification ACI-CFTT Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1 ACI-CCI Concrete Construction Inspector ACI-STT Strength Testing Technician American Society of Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT) Certification ASNT Non-Destructive Testing Technician – Level II or III National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) NICET-CT Concrete Technician – Levels 1, II, III & IV



Final Report of Special Inspections Project: Location: Owner: Owner’s Address: Architect of Record: Structural Engineer of Record: To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project, and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved. Any unresolved issues are listed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. (Attach additional sheets if required to complete the description of unresolved issues) Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector or Agent Type or print name Signature Date Signing this form acknowledges that all Special Inspections and testing for this specific project were completed in strict compliance with the 2018 International Building Code.

Design Professional Seal


01 50 00-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.



C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm).



C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV or 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures”.

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:



1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as directed by Architect/Owner. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.



1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks

where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas, University buildings and within 30 feet of marked entrances to university buildings.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

J. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere as required to maintain a neat and orderly site.

K. Hazardous Wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local regulations.

L. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.



3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

B. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing

the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

C. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure

to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.



D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."



01 73 00-1 EXECUTION

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record

Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection



2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and

ease of removal for replacement.



3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.



D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. Coordinate with utility provider if utility is to be abandoned.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core

drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.



I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls"

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

C. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

D. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.

E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that not part of the construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessively high or low temperatures. 3. Excessively high or low humidity. 4. Water or ice. 5. Solvents. 6. Chemicals.



7. Light. 8. Puncture. 9. Abrasion. 10. Heavy traffic. 11. Soiling, staining, corrosion. 12. Rodent and insect infestation. 13. Electrical current. 14. Improper lubrication. 15. Unusual wear or other misuse. 16. Contact between incompatible materials. 17. Misalignment. 18. Excessive weathering. 19. Unprotected storage. 20. Improper shipping or handling. 21. Theft. 22. Vandalism.



01 77 00-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. 2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements. 4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.



1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. In the Application for Payment that first follows the date of Substantial Completion, show supporting documentation for completion and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

4. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

5. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment,

and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.



D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties as indicated in individual sections for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.



2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PAPER SUBMITTALS 1. Provide (3) copies of approved submittals for owner each organized by division at end of project. 2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according

to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove

glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar

equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.



1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner’s property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



01 78 23-1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Four paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.



C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal.



5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.



a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use.



10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.



2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.



F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 "Project

Record Documents."



G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


MAY 2020 A-013861 KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION

01 78 39-1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.


A. Submit record documents to the Architect for the Owner’s records within 30 calendar days of Substantial Completion, without any mitigating circumstances. Failure to submit all required documents listed herein within this timeframe shall result in the 5% project retainage being held until such time that documents are provided in their entirety.

B. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

a. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

a) Submit one clean, undamaged set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings with all Addendums and contract modifications posted.

2) Submit record digital data files in PDF format. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

D. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.



1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

E. Record Samples: Meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner’s personnel to determine which of the submitted samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file and paper copy.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



01 79 00-1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to



corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each



module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments.



d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.



C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.



E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



02 41 16- 1 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 41 16 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of buildings. 2. Removing below-grade construction. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site

improvements. 3. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade site

improvements not part of building demolition.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified refrigerant recovery technician.



B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain including means of egress from those buildings.

C. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.

D. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Submit before the Work begins.

E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 3. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review and finalize protection requirements. 5. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 7. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner.


A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.

B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.



1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings.

2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings.

a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except

under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be present in

buildings and structures to be demolished because of building operations or processes performed there.

E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or operations of adjacent occupied buildings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of

conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations.

1. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning.



E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings,

then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Existing Utilities: See plumbing and electrical Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

D. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

E. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 2. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover.



C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. [Comply with requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."]

1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of

groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and

damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and

from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that

are exposed to building demolition operations. 7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and dirt

migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.

D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated buildings completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result from building demolition activities.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

D. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS

A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.



B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation.

C. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated on Drawings.

D. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction.

1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, to at least 12 inches (300 mm) below grade.

E. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures.

1. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings. 2. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and disconnecting devices.

3.6 SITE RESTORATION

A. Below-Grade Areas: Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new construction.

B. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials.

C. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

3.7 REPAIRS

A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas.

B. Do not burn demolished materials.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began.

1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.


02 41 19- 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.



1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by

selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's

partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.



c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.



6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 2. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


03 30 00- 1CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.2. Foundation walls.3. Slabs-on-grade..4. Concrete toppings.



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.2. Admixtures.3. Form materials and form-release agents.



4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.5. Curing compounds.6. Floor and slab treatments.7. Bonding agents.8. Adhesives.9. Vapor retarders.10. Joint-filler strips.11. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Concrete subcontractor.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as

follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.



H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. Coarse aggregates shall meet the requirements for use in regions of moderate weathering.

1. Nominal aggregate sizes shall not exceed Maximum Coarse Aggregate Sizes for each Concrete Mixture.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.



2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap (15 mil).b. Inteplast Group; Barrier-Bac VB-350 (16 mil)c. Insulation Solutions, Inc.: Viper Vaporcheck II (15 mil).d. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve, or as recommended by Geotechnical Report.

2.7 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.d. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Hard.e. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1166&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456816744&mf=&src=wd







B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.3. Slump Limit:

a. Concrete Including a Water-Reducing or Plasticizing Admixture: 7 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

b. Other Concrete: 4 inches , plus or minus 1 inch .

4. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1-1/2-inch.5. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of deliver.

B. Foundation Walls and Grade Beams: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:



1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.3. Slump Limit:

a. Concrete Including a Water-Reducing or Plasticizing Admixture: 7 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

b. Other Concrete: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1-1/2-inch.5. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd.3. Slump Limit:

a. Concrete Including a Water-Reducing or Plasticizing Admixture: 7 inches, plus or minus 1 inch .

b. Other Concrete: 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4-inch.5. Air Content:

a. Concrete Inside Building Thermal Enclosure: No limit.b. Concrete Outside Building Thermal Enclosure: 5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at

point of delivery.c. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.d. Use of air entrainment admixtures is prohibited for concrete scheduled to receive surface

hardener.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd..



3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, as indicated.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.



3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of walls, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.1. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or

disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Level and compact base material.2. Place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour3. Extend vapor retarder to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the top of the

slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to Engineer/Architect or (b) where obstructed by impediments (such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor retarder). At the point of termination, seal vapor retarder to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab itself.

4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.5. Apply seam tape to a clean and dry vapor retarder.6. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.7. Avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through the vapor retarder.8. If non-permanent stakes are driven through the vapor retarder, repair as recommended by vapor

retarder manufacturer.9. Repair damaged areas with vapor retarder material of similar (or better) permeance, puncture

and tensile strength.10. Unless otherwise indicated, vapor retarder shall always be installed directly beneath concrete

slab. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.



1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near

corners, and in concealed locations where possible.4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch . Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in [Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants,"] are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.



4. Unless indicated, construct isolation joints in exterior paving at intervals not to exceed 40 ft.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at

uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface

plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:



1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17.



1) Minimum local values of levelness, F(L) for slabs other than on-grade are not limited.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less

than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.4. Install #4 dowels to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install

#4 dowels on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base with a minimum of 4 dowels per base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.



C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.b. Continuous water-fog spray.c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and

edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old.3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat

brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.



3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by

cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before



bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.2. Headed bolts and studs.3. Verification of use of required design mixture.4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. One set of four specimens is required for concrete pours of an amount less than five cubic yards, if the concrete is to be part of the building structural system (i.e. footings, piers, walls)

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Additional Specimens. At Contractors option and expense additional specimens and testing shall be coordinated by the Contractor in the event that testing prior to 7 days is desirable due to scheduling.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Compressive Strength Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders as laboratory-cured specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at 7 days, two specimens at 28 days and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.

a. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.



8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.

3.15 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.



04 22 00- 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Masonry-cell insulation.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing

manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Pre-faced CMUs.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:



1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Pre-faced CMUs. 3. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing

average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.



C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

F. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

B. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

2.3 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings-rated assembly designs indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners whether indicated on drawings or not.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.

C. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph. 4. Pattern and Texture:

a. Split Face CMU: Basis of Design:

1) Color: Neutrals – As selected from Manufacturer Standard color selection 2) Pattern 8”x16” Running Bond

2.5 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.



5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder type with single pair of side rods.

2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into masonry but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Cast-in-Place Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; HB-5213-2X. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; HB Thermal Concrete 2-Seal Thermal Wing Nut Anchor. 3) Wire-Bond; RJ-711.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch, galvanized steel sheet.

C. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

D. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors



1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1] [Group 2] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" [Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"] and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet.

Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

6. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

Product standard of quality: York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS, 2. Accepted products:

a. York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS, (www.yorkmfg.com) b. STS Coatings, Inc.; Wall Guardian Venting Stainless Steel TWF (www.stscoatings.com) c. Building Materials West Company, Inc.; Evacu-Flash SS (www.evacu-flash.com)

3. Characteristics: a. Type: Engineered system, with high resistant to damage, composite with a stainless steel

with non-asphalt adhesive polymer fabric laminated to one stainless steel and non-woven drainage fabric laminated to opposing face with non-asphalt adhesive.

b. Stainless steel: type 304, ASTM A240. Domestically sourced per DFARS 252.225-7008 and/or DFARS 252.225-7009. c. Fabrics:

1) Polymer fabric; laminated back face to stainless steel core 2) Non-woven drainage fabric: Fabric laminated to front face stainless steel core.

d. Recycled content: stainless steel is 60% recycled e. Size: Manufacturer's standard width rolls.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing

with a drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing.



D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in [Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

2.12 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I. Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.


a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil.

2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.



4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:



1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.



1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to

comply with Section 07 84 46 “Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.”

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings

where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12

inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.



3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.

horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.



3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.



3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste.

Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



05 21 00- 1STEEL JOIST FRAMING

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists.2. Joist accessories.


1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications"

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications" and "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of Standard Practice."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Do not camber joists.

D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.2 PRIMERS

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.



2.3 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated.

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

F. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.4 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.



1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.

E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



05 31 00- 1STEEL DECKING

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.



B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.2. Epic Metals Corporation.3. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.5. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1511&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456824748&mf=04&src=wd






a. Color: Gray or White.b. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib.3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches.4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch5. Span Condition: Double Span.6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

I. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.



B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Roof Deck to Steel Supporting Member Fastening: Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members as follows:

1. Fastener Spacing: Fasten edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two fasteners per deck unit at each support. Space fasteners 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter.

a. Weld with arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long:

1) Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Approved Mechanical fasteners types:

1) For use with steel bar joist and light structural steel framing supports with top chord or flange thickness 1/8 in. to 1/2 in.:

a) Hilti X-HSN24 (1/8 in. up to and including 3/8 in.)b) Simpson Strong-Tie Strong-Drive XL Large-Head Metal Screw (1/8 in.

up to and including 1/2 in.)c) Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum

during the bidding period.

2) For use with structural steel framing supports with top flange thickness 1/4 in. or thicker:

a) Hilti X-ENP-19 L15b) Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum

during the bidding period.



B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



05 40 00- 1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Soffit framing.


1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing

and ceiling-suspension assemblies.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.




C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips. 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. MarinoWARE. 3. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 4. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 5. Harter Company Sales and Technical. 6. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6242&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456828490~M.%0d$M~MBA%20Building%20Supplies,%20Inc~$m~123456830648&mf=04&src=wd




1. Design Loads: As indicated 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater

than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height under

a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. d. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 for live loads and l/240 for total loads of the

span. e. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for

total loads of the span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade:

a. 0.0428 inch and lighter members: ST33H. b. 0.0538 inch and heavier members: ST50H.



2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50. 2. Coating: G60.

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Section Properties: As Indicated.

D. Steel Single- or Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows:

E. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. Simpson Strong-Tie. c. Steel Network, Inc. (The). d. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.





3. Section Properties: As Indicated.

2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness, not less than thickness of framing members, and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.



B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with

fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing

members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.



E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing and infill studs and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

F. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inchesapart. Fasten at each stud intersection.



1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel straps and stud track solid blocking of width and

thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

a. Flat strap Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inches. b. Flat Strap Width: 2 inches.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



05 50 00- 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other

Sections. 6. Shelf angles. 7. Metal bollards. 8. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be

cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 04 22 00 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.




A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Metal nosings and treads. 3. Paint products. 4. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.



2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

F. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

G. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

H. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface.

I. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

K. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741.

1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.



F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings." Shop primers shall not be alkyd-based for High-Performance Coatings, Typical. Shop primers for “Exterior Painting” and “Interior Painting” on Ferrous Metal may be alkyd-based.

B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated.

1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24

inches o.c.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-

inch top plates.

E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

F. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.



2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately

2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize and prime miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

2.9 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls

and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for

wire.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard.

C. Prime bollards with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."



2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

C. Prime plates with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless primers specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:



1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast

Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings":

SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.



B. Anchor supports for overhead doors securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



05 52 13- 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel railings.


1. Section 05 51 12 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.



2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post,

handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.

a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

F. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one of the following:

a. Wagner, R & B, Inc. b. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.


A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1544&mf=04&src=wd&mf=&src=wd




B. Tubing: ASTM A 513.

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 5. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of

railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum and stainless-steel railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.



B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

F. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

I. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.



H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows

after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

K. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. As detailed.

L. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.

R. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.



S. Expanded-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from expanded metal made from same metal as railings in which they are installed.

1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as expanded metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick.

2. Orient expanded metal with long dimension of diamonds as indicated on Drawings.

T. Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from same metal as railings in which they are installed.

1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick.

2. Orient perforated metal with pattern as indicated on Drawings.

U. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings in which they are installed.

1. Orient wire mesh with as indicated on Drawings.

V. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

D. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless primers specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.

2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

F. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS



A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

D. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.

Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed

steel reinforcements. 5. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through

concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



06 10 00- 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.



3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or

back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.



1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. 4. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. 5. Roof construction. 6. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).



F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy

Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Adhesives for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.

H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.

K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.



1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood

filler. 3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.



06 16 00- 1 SHEATHING

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" 2. Section 07 25 00 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.".

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

C. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

D. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

E. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.5 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: As required to suit stud spacing indicated. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.


a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. c. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation.






2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.

G. Screws for Fastening Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer.

2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.




A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Sheathing:

a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.



3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that

might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.



06 40 23 - 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

1. PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Plastic-laminate countertops. 2. Closet and utility shelving. 3. Grommets. 4. Closet Coat Rods and Shelf System. 5. Closet Coat Rods. 6. Coat Hooks.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 00 Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”, if included, for requirements relating to interpretation of the drawings and specifications.

2. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

3. Division 09 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stair work are specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry”.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, fire-retardant-treated materials and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.



2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

5. Apply AWI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.


1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Particleboard. 2. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface

finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates

G. Qualification Data: For Installer & fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project, whose products have a record of successful in-service performance, and have sufficient capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program who can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and



inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination”.


A. Protect woodwork during delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration.

B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurement cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade [M-2] [M-2-Exterior Glue]. 4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade

M-2, except for density.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work – reference drawings.

2. Or equal product from other approved manufacturers, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period:

a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

D. CLOSET COAT RODS AND SHELVES

1. Manufacturer: Provide Tubular Nickel Chrome Plated Steel Wall-Mounted Racks at locations and of lengths shown on the drawings. Wall Racks shall be model 350 Series, Single Shelf with Hanger Pole by Raymond Engineering (800) 365-5770. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

E. CLOSET COAT RODS

1. Manufacturer: Provide Tubular Nickel Chrome Plated Steel Coat Rods and accessories at locations and of lengths shown on the drawings. Coat rods shall be model 801.12.205, Wardrobe Rail by Häfele (919) 889-2322. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

a. Product: Häfele, 25 mm Wardrobe Rails, 801.12.205. b. Product: Häfele, 25 mm Wardrobe Rail Supports, 803.18.743. c. Product: Häfele, 25 mm Wardrobe Rail Support Set, 803.53.200. d. Product: Häfele, 25 mm Wardrobe Rail Center Support, 802.02.250.

F. COAT HOOKS

1. Manufacturer: Provide Coat Hooks by Häfele (800) 423-3531. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.



a. Product: Häfele, #842.20.959, 17 mm W x 41 mm D x 47 mm H. Color: Silver colored anodized aluminum.


A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified.

1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type:

1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Interior Type: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-

response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying

processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

5. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively.

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 - 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively.

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Duraflake FR” by Weyerhaeuser.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Medite FR” by SierraPine Ltd.; Medite Div.



E. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: Doug Mockett & Company at (800) 523-1269. Provide a minimum of one grommet per knee space whether indicated on the drawings or not.

1. 2-5/8” Overall Diameter Grommets shall be Doug Mockett & Company, Model—GRN1, Finish—Satin Nickel (17) for cable passage through countertops at locations as shown on drawings.

2. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

F. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

E. Adhesives for Bonding Plastic Laminate:

1. Horizontal / Countertop Surfaces: Unpigmented, Formaldehyde-Free Contact Cement. 2. Vertical Surfaces: PVA (Wilsonart 3000 Rigid Set Glue) or approved equal. 3. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

F. Fasteners: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for screws; FS FF-N-105 for nails.


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:



1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4-inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4-inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8-inch (3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16-inch (1.5

mm).

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trim fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C “Countertops”.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: Grade HGS (0.050-inch / 1.2 mm or greater thickness).

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer’s designations. 2. Match Architect’s sample. 3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer’s full range in the following categories:

a. Solid colors, Matte finish. b. Patterns, Matte finish.

E. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

F. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces

G. Core Material: [Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard] [Particleboard] [Medium density fiberboard] [Particleboard made with exterior glue] [Medium density fiberboard made with exterior glue] [Exterior-grade plywood] [Fire-retardant particleboard].



H. Core Material at Sinks: [Particleboard made with exterior glue] [Medium density fiberboard made with exterior glue] [or] [Exterior-grade plywood].

I. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, or underside of countertop substrate.

J. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

2.6 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600.

B. Grade: Custom

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: Grade HGS (0.050-inch / 1.2 mm or greater thickness).

D. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch (19 mm) [solid lumber] [veneer-faced panel product with solid-lumber edge] [veneer-faced panel product with veneer edge banding] [medium-density fiberboard with solid-lumber edge] [particleboard with solid-lumber edge] [medium-density fiberboard with radiused edge] [particleboard with radiused and filled edge].

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back-priming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer’s written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.



F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails [or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch in 8’-0” (3 mm in 2400 mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes [to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.] [and] [to walls with adhesive].

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.

H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

I. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700.Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700.

J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Install per manufacturer’s instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored, at locations as indicated on drawings.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes restoring damaged or soiled areas.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, which insures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



06 41 16-1 PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTUAL CABINETS

SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.


1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking

and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items

installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.


1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Adhesives.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. Woodwork, including installation, shall comply with AWI requirements of grades specified. 3. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and

additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following :

a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Panolam Industries International, Inc. e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Post-formed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS. 5. Pattern Direction: As indicated.

G. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: Laminate Grade VGS.









b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Birch 9 and 13 plywood finished with clear lacquer 3. Drawer Bottoms: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. Wilsonart

pattern/color—Designer White, D354-60.

H. Cabinet Toe Kicks: Toe Kicks shall be horizontal grade (HGS) plastic laminate, Typ. See drawings for designated plastic laminate(s). Basis of Design Typical Plastic Laminate Toe Kick: Nevamar pattern/color—Wrought Iron, S6054T Textured Retain "Dust Panels" Paragraph below if required. Dust panels are not required by standards. UNO.

I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

J. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. Wilsonart pattern/color—Designer White, D354-60.

K. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.

L. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Manufacturers: Provide plastic laminate by Manufacturer(s) listed below. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

1) PL-1 = Formica #912-58 Storm – Matte Finish 2) PL-2 = Wilsonart #4939K-18 Vapor Strandz

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing

no urea formaldehyde.


A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction



and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-

response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying

processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively.

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively.




a. Flakeboard Company Limited; Duraflake FR. b. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.


a. SierraPine; Medite FR. b. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 120 degrees of opening, self-closing.

1. Grass 3803/3804 Snap-on Hinge. 2. Blum: 71T5550 / 71T5650 CLIP Top Hinge. 3. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

1. Häfele Stainless Steel Handles. Material/Finish: Stainless Steel Matt.

a. Product 117.05.600, 146 mm (5.75” overall length) / 96 mm (CTC/screw to screw).

D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131

E. First option in "Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports" Paragraph below specifies standards and clip-type rests for mounting at ends of shelves; second specifies standards and knife-type brackets for mounting at rear of shelves.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

2. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.







H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

1. CompX – National Camlock: Model 8053 with C2016-C2 plate

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

1. CompX – National Cabinet Lock: Model C8703

J. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets: Provide 2” grommets for cable passage through countertops at locations as shown on drawings. Grommets shall be model EDP, black by Doug Mockett & Company at (800) 523-1269. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period. Provide a minimum of one grommet per knee space whether indicated on the drawings or not.

B. Velcrotab Wire Management: Provide velcrotab wire managers at locations as shown on drawings, but no less than 1 for every 18” of countertop where wire management is shown. Wire managers shall be model WM-7 by Doug Mockett & Company at (800) 523-1269. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

C. Continuous Wire Management: Provide wire managers at locations as shown on drawings, but no less than 1 for every 18” of countertop where wire management is shown. Wire managers shall be model WM37 Doodle Snake Wire Manager by Doug Mockett & Company at (800) 523-1269. Coil-like design creates multiple channels and wires can be inserted through any of the chambers on either side, tidying up loose wires and controlling the direction of cabling. Install per manufacturer’s written instructions. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

1. Length: 12” 2. Color: Gray (92)

D. Stainless Steel Bracket Supports: Provide heavy-duty folded stainless steel bracket supports at locations as shown on drawings.

1. Stainless Steel Bracket Supports for 36” D Countertops: Brackets shall be Speed Brace

bracket model 287-77-003 (Stainless Steel 304) by Hafele America Co. at (919) 889-2322. Bracket Dimensions: 21” x 28”.

2. Stainless Steel Bracket Supports for 24 - 30” D Countertops: Brackets shall be Speed Brace bracket model 287-77-002 (Stainless Steel 304) by Hafele America Co. at (919) 889-2322. Bracket Dimensions: 15” x 18”.



3. Other equal products may be provided if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install

dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.



B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25 mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Install per manufacturer’s instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored and at locations as indicated on drawings.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.



07 21 00- 1 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Vapor retarders.





A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Fire Resistance Ratings: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. Combustion Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 136 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.



B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site

before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. e. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2. Type VI, 1.8 pcf min. density where supporting backfill, Type IV elsewhere. 3. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa).

B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Pactiv Building Products. d. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION


1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799690&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd













3. Knauf Insulation. 4. Owens Corning. 5. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.

E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) in from exterior walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."



3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members.

b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.



4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.

1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

4. Install foil/polyester VB where installation is exposed in plenum.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



07 25 00 - 1 WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 25 00 – WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap.


1. Section 06 16 00 “Sheathing” for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.



1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.


A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier, from ICC-ES.

B. Provide manufacturer representative observation report of installation prior to weather barrier being covered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier, with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


a. DuPont (E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek Commercial Wrap. b. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

B. Performance Characteristics:



1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357.

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test

Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test

Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame

Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10.

C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

D. Fasteners: 1-5/8” rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4” or 2” metal gasketed washer.

E. Flashing: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations recommended by manufacturer. Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B. Examination: Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

C. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

D. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors.

E. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap.

F. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level.

G. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

H. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

I. Overlap Weather Barrier:



1. Exterior Corners: Minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: Minimum 6 inches.

3.2 SEAMING

A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

3.3 OPENING PREPARATION

A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening.

B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.4 FLASHING

A. Cut flexible flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening.

B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning flexible flashing edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

C. Fan flexible flashing at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of flashing at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start flashing at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill.

E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing.

F. Install flexible flashing at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

G. Coordinate flashing with window installation.

H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193.

I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using flashing over the 45-degree seams.

J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193.




A. Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain REQUIRED periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage.



07 62 00- 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed equipment support flashing.


1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" 2. Section 13 34 19 “Metal Building Systems” for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing

and trim integral with roofing.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish

between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in

Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners,

cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile.

2. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 3. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color required.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including built-in gutter where applicable, approximately 10 feet (3.0 m) long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.



B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

E. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: Match adjacent metal system. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester

backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.




a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Grace Ice and Water

Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA. e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment. g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT. h. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT. i. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA-HT.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or

lower.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.














A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on

faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Retain one of three seams paragraphs below; revise to suit Project. Retain first for metals being soldered. Soldering requires removal of painted, coated, or lacquered finishes.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.



3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

D. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.



1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 04 22 00 "Concrete Unit Masonry."

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.



D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



07 92 00- 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in paved roads, parking lots, walkways, and curbing.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.


A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.



2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

1. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.



B. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT

C. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Pecora Corporation; 898NST.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330. As approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.



C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in

ASTM C 1193.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant: Urethane T.. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies. f. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. g. Joints between metal panels. h. Joints between different materials listed above. i. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers. j. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. k. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane 50 NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls and partitions. d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete. e. All vertical interior urethane resisting joints.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. All interior joints not otherwise indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.



b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



08 11 13 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.




A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Republic Doors and Frames. 4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 5. West Central Manufacturing 6. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.








2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. All interior locations.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. All exterior locations.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with

minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

f. Core: Polyisocyanurate.

1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.



4. Exposed Finish: Factory.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less

than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 MATERIALS


B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."



J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide flush

closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same

material as face sheets. 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to

escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80

for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610

mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:



1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610

mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types

indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field

splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly

set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to

comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

JULY 2020 A-013861KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION


4. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, andplumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal lineparallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs onparallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8mm).

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing” and with hollow-metalmanufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, includinghollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coatand apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paintaccording to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finishaccording to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in paintingSections.


LPloude

Underline

LPloude

Underline

LPloude

Underline


08 14 16-1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished

doors.

2. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish specified. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.




A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.





2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. VT Industries, Inc. 6. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors indicated to be blueprint matched with paneling from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

E. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or

armor plates. c. 5-inch mid-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2

F. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.







a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

G. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:

a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. c. 5-inch (125-mm) mid-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. d. 5-inch (125-mm) mid-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-

holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf (2440 N) per WDMA T.M.-10.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: White Oak 3. Cut: Rift 4. Veneer layup: Slip Match 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor-door

faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet (3 m) or more. 8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area

of building. 9. Transom Match: Continuous match. 10. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as

adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in

11. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A. 12. Core: Particleboard. 13. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed

before veneering. 14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.



B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.

D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable

requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 23" Interior Painting.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable,

acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin.

JULY 2020 A-013861KDOT GAGE SUBAREA MODIFICATION


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swingcharacteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referencedquality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below;do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting andmachining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch frombottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Wherethreshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unlessotherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.b. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extentpermitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Projectsite.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors maybe repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair orrefinishing.



08 36 13 - 1 SECTIONAL DOORS

SECTION 08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.



A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of

field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on

structure. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Flat door sections with sensor edge on bottom section. 2. Frame for paneled door sections; of each width of stile and rail required. 3. Panel for raised-panel door sections; not smaller than required to show raised-panel profile.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of operation cycles. c. Faulty operation of hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and

use; rust through. e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.



1. Design Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330 or DASMA 108 for garage doors and complying with the acceptance criteria of DASMA 108.

3. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width.

b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of the door height.

4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa) wind load, acting inward and outward.

C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide sectional doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to [ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1] [ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2] [ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3] [ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4] [or DASMA 115]

1. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet (9.144 m) of grade.

2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Company – Themacore Section Door Model 596 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amarr Garage Doors. b. Arm-R-Lite. c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. d. Clopay Building Products. e. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties. f. Haas Door. g. Harmann LLC. h. Martin Door Manufacturing. i. Raynor. j. Rite-Hite Corporation. k. Wayne-Dalton Corp. l. Windsor Door.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1 and 40.2 km/h) when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105.

D. R-Value: 17.40 (U-Value 0.057)

E. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

1. Section Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm) 2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 20 gauge.



a. Surface: Manufacturer's standard, flush

3. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated. 4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

a. Thickness: 26 gauge

F. Track Configuration: 2” track.

1. Standard Lift 2. High Lift

a. See drawings for door lift heights

G. Windows: Approximately 24 by 8 inches (610 by 279 mm) with curved corners, and spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; installed with glazing of the following type: 1. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard. –frosted lite.

H. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

I. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard.

J. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Keyed lock with assembly and chain lock keeper.

K. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

L. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator

M. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90 cycles per day. 2. Operator Type: Manufacturer's standard for door requirements. 3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial

use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet (2.4 m) or lower.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black

7. Control Station: Interior-side mounted 8. Other Equipment: Portable, radio-control system.

N. Door Finish:

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 3. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range



2.4 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS

A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness.

1. Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches (610 mm) high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weather-resistant seal, with a reinforcing flange return.

2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door.

B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart.

C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal.

D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place.

E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

F. Board Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard polystyrene or polyurethane board insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84; or with glass-fiber-board insulation. Secure insulation to exterior face sheet. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections and the interior facing material, with no exposed insulation.

G. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections and the interior facing material, with no exposed insulation.

H. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness.

I. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation.

2.6 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings, Provide



complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading.

1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Slope tracks at an angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door

unit is closed. 3. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without sag,

sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device.

a. For Vertical Track: Continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and attached to wall with jamb brackets.

b. For Horizontal Track: Continuous reinforcing angle from curve in track to end of track, attached to track and supported at points by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.

B. Removable Center Posts: Manufacturer's standard [carry-away] [roll-away] [swing-up] type for multiple doors in one opening.

C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- (2.01-mm-) nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is impossible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors more than 16 feet (4.88 m) wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.

D. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up operated or emergency-operated door with galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.8 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys: Two.

C. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.



D. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.9 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet (4.88 m) long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet (4.88 m) long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 7 to 1.

D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.

E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf (111-N) force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Chamberlain Group, Inc. (The).

2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70,

Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.



C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.

1. Trolley: Trolley operator mounted to ceiling above and to rear of door in raised position and directly connected to door with drawbar.

2. Jackshaft, Center Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall above door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.

3. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 115V. c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

5. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators.

E. Limit Switches: Equip motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom section. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

3. Pneumatic Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure, push-button control labeled "Close."



1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

L. Portable, Radio-Control System: Consisting of two of the following:

1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door. 2. Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact type; control to close

door shall be sustained- or constant-pressure type. 3. Remote antenna and mounting kit.

2.12 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.13 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Tracks:

1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart.

2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter.

D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.



08 41 13 - 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

SECTION 08 41 13 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1. GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer’s standard sizes.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.



B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2. PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.



1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding a uniform test pressure of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-loading design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).



F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.55 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer 451T Storefront System or comparable product by one of the following:

1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Manko Window Systems. 3. Tubelite. 4. Or approved equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer’s extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system or screw spline.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer’s standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.




D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer’s standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS

A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.

1. Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). 2. Exterior Skin: Aluminum.

a. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for finish and texture indicated. b. Finish: Match framing system. c. Texture: Embossed. d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, tempered hardboard.

3. Interior Skin: Aluminum.

a. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for finish and texture indicated. b. Finish: Match framing system. c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, tempered hardboard.

4. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer’s standard rigid, closed-cell, polyisocyanurate board.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer’s standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with



reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware.".

2.7 GLAZING

A. Glazing Comply with Section 08 80 00 “Glazing”.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.9 FABRICATION



A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain

required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed form view to greatest extent

possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three

silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants” to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 “Glazing.”

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants” and according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers’ written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

I. Provide end dams at all window systems.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES



A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.



08 45 23- 1 INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL SYSTEM

SECTION 08 45 23 – INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the insulated translucent sandwich panel wall system and accessories as shown and specified. Work includes providing and installing:

1. Flat factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels. 2. Aluminum installation system. 3. Aluminum flashing


1. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” 2. Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants”

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data. Include construction details, material descriptions, profiles and finishes of skylight components.

B. Submit shop drawings. Include elevations and details.

C. Submit manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished aluminum.

1. When requested, submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and material indicated for the work and in size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets consisting of two or more units showing the full range of variations expected.

a. Sandwich Panels: 14” x 28” units. b. Factory Finished Aluminum: 5” long sections.

D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by installer, certifying compliance with project qualification requirements.

E. Submit product reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project.

1. Reports Required:

a. International Building Code Evaluation Report. b. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card. c. Burn Extent (ASTM D 635) d. Color Difference (ASTM D 2244) e. Impact Strength (UL 972)



f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C 297 after aging by ASTM D 1037) g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D 1002) h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E 72) i. Fall Through Resistance (ASTM E 661) j. Insulation U-Factor (NFRC 100) k. NFRC System U-Factor Certification (NFRC 700) l. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (NFRC or Calculations) m. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) n. Air Leakage (ASTM E 283) o. Structural Performance (ASTM E 330) p. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331) q. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E 108) r. UL Listed Class A Roof System (UL 790) (Optional) – Submit UL Card s. Daylight Autonomy


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten years or longer.

2. Panel system must be listed by an ANSI accredited Evaluation Service, which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an accredited agency.

3. Quality control inspections shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with aC177 “translucent Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Faced Panel Wall, Roof and Skylight Systems” as issued by the ICC-ES.



B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the business of installing specified skylight systems for at least two consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.


A. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete skylight panel system.

1. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Standard skylight system shall have not less than 0.01 cfm/ft2 air leakage by ASTM E 283 at 6.24 PSF (50 mph) and no water penetration by ASTM E 331 at 15 PSF; and structural testing by ASTM E 330.

3. Structural Loads: Provide skylight system capable of handling the following loads:

a. Live Load: 30 PSF b. Snow Load: 30 PSF; Drift Load: 53 PSF (As Indicated) c. Wind Load: 24 PSF

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in manufacturer’s standard protective packaging.

B. Store panels on the long edge; several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover in accordance with manufacturer’s storage and handling instructions.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s and installer’s written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel system work, which fails in materials or workmanship within one year of the date of delivery. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering, defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work.

B. Extended Warranty: 20 Year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. The basis for this specification is for products manufactured by Kalwall Corporation. Other manufacturers may bid for this project provided they comply with all of the performance requirements of this specification and submit evidence thereof. Listing other manufacturers’ names in this specification does not constitute approval of their products or relieve them of compliance with all the performance requirements contained herein.

2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS

A. Face Sheets:



1. Translucent Faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically for architectural use.

a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable. b. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.

2. Interior Face Sheets:

a. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 25 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

b. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1”.

3. Exterior Face Sheets:

a. Color Stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5° facing south, determined by the average of at least three white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

b. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact minimum of 70 ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

4. Appearance:

a. Exterior Face Sheets: Smooth, .070 thick and crystal in color. b. Interior Face Sheets: Smooth, .045 thick and crystal in color. c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.

B. Grid Core:

1. Flat I-beam gird core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 7/16”.

2. I-Beam Thermal Break: Minimum 1”, thermoset fiberglass composite.



C. Laminated Adhesive:

1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives”.

2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C 297 after two exposures to six cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D 1037.

3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after exposure to four separate conditions:

a. 50% Relative Humidity at 68° F: 540 PSI b. 182° F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI

2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking I-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge.

1. Thickness: 2-3/4” 2. Light Transmission: 30% 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient .46. 4. Panel U-Factor by NFRC Certified Laboratory: 2-3/4” thermally broken grid .53 or 2-3/4”

aluminum grid .53. 5. Grid Pattern: Nominal size 24x12; pattern reverse shoji.

B. Standard panels shall deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 PSF in 10’-0” span without a supporting frame by ASTM E 72.

C. Standard panels shall withstand 1200° F fire for minimum one hour without collapse or exterior flaming.

D. Thermally Broken Panels: Minimum condensation resistance factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the bond line.

2.4 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM

A. Closure System:

1. Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system. 2. Curved closure system may be roll formed. 3. Skylight perimeter closures at curbs shall be factory sealed to panels.

B. Sealing Tape: Manufacturer’s standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions.

C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.

D. Finish:



1. Manufacturer’s factory applied finish, which meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards.

2. Mill (optional).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer shall examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions.

B. Do not proceed with panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete, masonry or pressure treated wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install the panel system in accordance with the manufacturer’s suggested installation recommendations and approved shop drawings.

1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system. 2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide

weather-tight construction.

B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.


A. Water Test: Installer to test skylights according to procedures in AAMA 501.2.

B. Repair or replace work that does not pass testing or that is damaged by testing and retest work.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean the skylight system interior and exterior, immediately after installation.

B. Refer to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


08 71 00 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Hinges. 2. Key control system. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4. Lock and latch sets. 5. Bolts. 6. Exit devices. 7. Push/pull units. 8. Closers. 9. Overhead holders. 10. Miscellaneous door control devices. 11. Door trim units. 12. Protection plates. 13. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 14. Sound stripping for interior doors. 15. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms). 16. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 17. Thresholds.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal frames.

2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

D. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

E. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.



1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

F. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

1. All fire-rated openings to have UL listed latching hardware, surface closers, and smoke seals.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.



D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).

E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers. Where no other manufacturer is allowed, it is so noted next to the product. Subject to compliance with requirements, products of other manufacturers may be submitted for review and approval as noted in Division 1 Section “Substitutions”. Model numbers of products indicated in “Hardware Schedule” refer to following manufacturers listed as “Basis of Specification”:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a. Ives Hinge Co. b. Bommer. c. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. d. McKinney.

2. Locksets (No Substitution): a. Best – 9k Series

3. Panic Devices

a. Von Duprin – 99 Series b. Falcon – 25 Series c. Sargent – 80 Series

4. Overhead Closers:

a. LCN – 4040XP Series b. Yale – 5800 Series

c. Norton – 9500 Series

5. Overhead Stops:

a. Glynn Johnson – 90s/100s Series b. Rixson – 9/10 series

6. Door Trim Units:

a. Ives b. Rockwood c. Trimco

7. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:



a. Ives b. Trimco

2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

B. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:

1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation is listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.

2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.

a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. c. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3. d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6. g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8. i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12. j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13. k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14. l. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15. m. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17. o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated.

B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.



2.3 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:

1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Number of Hinges: Provide 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. All locksets to be grade 1 heavy duty cylindrical.

B. Keying Conference: Conduct a keying conference to comply with requirements in Division 01.

2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Provide extra-long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides

non-recessed strike for bolt.

B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.

1. Provide 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts.

C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height.

2.6 PUSH/PULL UNITS

A. Concealed fasteners preferred.

B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units.

2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES



A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.

B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing.

C. Provide any brackets or plates required for proper installation of the door closer. Wherever possible, locate the closer on the inside of the room.

2.8 DOOR TRIM UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates.

C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).

2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.

2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface



protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.

D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:

1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.

3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units.

4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.



3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.

Door Hardware Sets:

Hardware Group No. 01 For use on Door #(s):

100.1 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 628 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9975-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON

1 EA CYLINDER CYLINDER AS REQ'D 626 BES

1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 10" O 630 IVE

1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN

1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4040XP-18 689 LCN

1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040XP-61 689 LCN

1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER

1 EA WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR AND FRAME MFG

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223 A ZER

1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE

1 EA DOOR OPERATOR SW300 AA

2 EA ACTUATOR 506-557 AA Hardware Group No. 02 For use on Door #(s):

110.1 116.1 127.1 151.2 152.5 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9975-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON





1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE

1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER

1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER

1 EA WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR AND FRAME MFG

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223 A ZER

1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE






1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 628 IVE

1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 330 626 VON



1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4040XP-18 689 LCN

1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040XP-61 689 LCN

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE

1 EA DOOR OPERATOR 4642 LCN

2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-3860TW LCN Hardware Group No. 04 For use on Door #(s):

110.2 116.2 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 330-DT-990 626 VON




3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 05 For use on Door #(s):

127 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 99-L-F-06 626 VON


1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK M490P 12/24 VDC 628 SCE





1 EA PUSH BUTTON 621ALEX DA 12/24 VDC 630 SCE

1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII 12/24 VDC WHT SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS-FA 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

EA CARD ACCESS BY ACCESS CONTROL PROVIDER







1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 9K37R 15D 626 BES

1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK M490P 12/24 VDC 628 SCE

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN




1 EA PUSH BUTTON 621ALEX DA 12/24 VDC 630 SCE

1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII 12/24 VDC WHT SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS-FA 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

EA CARD ACCESS BY ACCESS CONTROL PROVIDER


115 119 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 9K37D 15d 626 BES





120 144 148 149 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 9K37D 15d 626 BES




128 Reuse Salvaged door hardware




110.3 117 124.1 142 150 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
















103 104 105 107 108 109

113 114 125 140 141 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA OFFICE LOCK 9K37B 15D 626 BES



121 122 146 147 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA PRIVACY SET 45H 0L 15D VIN 626 BES




3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE







1 EA OFFICE LOCK 9K37B 15D 626 BES





151.1 152.1 152.2 152.3 152.4 152.6

152.7 152.8 152.9 Provide each RU door(s) with the following:


EA NOTE HARDWARE BY DOOR AND FRAME MFG



08 80 00 - 1 GLAZING

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products:

1. Vision lites. 2. Entrances and other doors. 3. Storefront construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples of manufacturer's standard sealant colors for selection by Architect.

C. Samples of glass to include tinted glass.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with "FGMA Glazing Manual" and "LSGA Design Guide," except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Safety Glass: ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC).

C. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar to that indicated for Project.

1. Note that the glazing subcontractor shall provide safety glazing in all locations where required by the Building Code whether shown on the drawings or not.

a. The glazing subcontractor shall verify which version of the Building Code has been adopted by the governing authority where the project will be built.

D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar to that indicated for Project.


A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials.


08 80 00 - 2 GLAZING

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contactor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in “Definitions” article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in “Definitions” article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.


D. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in “Definitions” article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following:

1. Ford Glass Division 2. Libby-Owens-Ford Co. 3. P.P.G. Industries, Inc.

B. See Glass Schedule at the end of this section for specific glass types.

2.2 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Laminated Glass Products: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified at the end of this Section. Refer to primary and heat-treated glass requirements relating to properties of glass products comprising laminated glass products.


08 80 00 - 3 GLAZING

B. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, in clear or colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.


a. Polyvinyl Butyral Interlayer:

1) Saflex, Monsanto Co. 2) Butacite, E.I. du Pont De Nemous & Co., Inc.

C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows:

1. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.

C. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: ASTM C 920.

2.4 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with 100% solids content, nonstaining and nonmigrating, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers, and complying with AAMA 800.

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient polyvinylchloride or other material as required.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: As recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: Blocks or extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness as required.

D. Edge Blocks: As needed to limit glass lateral movement (side-walking).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with installation tolerances; minimum required face or edge clearances; and effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


08 80 00 - 4 GLAZING

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING

A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Use a rolling block in rotating glass to prevent damage to corners. Use suction cups to shift glass within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants.

D. Install elastomeric setting blocks, sized and located to comply with glazing standard. Set blocks in thin course of sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

F. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced publications.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction for build-up of alkali deposits or stains and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

3.5 GLASS SCHEDULE

A. CLEAR FLOAT GLASS

1. Description: Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 2. Thickness: 1/4" unless otherwise noted.


08 80 00 - 5 GLAZING

B. CLEAR SAFETY GLASS

1. Description: Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, Kind FT, Condition A. 2. Thickness: 1/4" unless otherwise noted.

C. CLEAR INSULATING FLOAT GLASS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Solarban 60. 2. Thickness: ¼ “glass, ½ “air space, 1” overall. 3. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 5. Outdoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 8. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 11. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum.

D. CLEAR INSULATING SAFETY GLASS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: VItro Solarban 60. 2. Thickness: ¼ “glass, ½ “air space, 1” overall. 3. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 5. Outdoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 8. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 11. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum.



08 83 00- 1 MIRRORS

SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of the following:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror.

C. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.



08 83 00- 2 MIRRORS

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503.


08 83 00- 3 MIRRORS

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality, ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission. Provide surface-mount mirrors with polished edges (see drawings). See ASTM C 1503 for intended use recommendations based on thickness.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Unframed with polished edges.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Aluminum J-Channels and Cleat: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece.

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch in height, respectively.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2) Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding

period.

2. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height matching bottom trim and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2) Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding

period.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Mirror Bottom Clips: As indicated

C. Mirror Top Clips: As indicated

D. Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel shapes with plated finish indicated.






08 83 00- 4 MIRRORS

1. Profile: As indicated.

E. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

F. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.


08 83 00- 5 MIRRORS

C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Aluminum J-Channels and Cleat: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.

2. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

3. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.



09 22 16- 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS


B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.



C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness, unless otherwise indicated:

1) Framing behind standard panels: 0.0269” inches 2) Framing behind impact resistant panels: 0.0329” inches 3) Framing behind tile backer panels: 0.0329 inches

b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inches

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches 2. Clip Angel: Not less than 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 inches thick, galvanized steel.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.




a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. d. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration

without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.








A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm)

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.



E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend

through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.



8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



09 29 00 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension

systems that support gypsum board panels.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.



2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation. 6. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 3.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.









2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. d. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim

flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or high-

build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.







D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. e. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.









3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and

decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Walls to 48” AFF where floor elevation is below surrounding

grade on any side of building.

B. Single-Layer Application:



1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

1. If control joints are not shown on the drawings they shall be located at a maximum of 30 feet o.c. Coordinate exact location with Architect prior to installation.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:



1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840 and Gypsum Association GA-214-10.

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 5: All locations.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting.”

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



09 30 00-1 TILING

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

1. GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Porcelain ceramic tile. 2. Glazed ceramic tile. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 5. Sealer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples of tile for verification by Architect.

B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Care and maintenance data for each tile product specified.

D. Care and maintenance data for each grout and sealer product specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed tile installations similar to that indicated for Project.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for labeling.


A. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F or more for 7 days after completion unless otherwise indicated by grout and mortar manufacturers.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed.


09 30 00-2 TILING

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: ANSI A137.1. Provide tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining tile.

C. Manufacturers: Provide tile by Manufacturer listed below. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period. All alternates must be submitted to Architect no later than 96 hours prior to Bid Date and Tile,

1. Marazzi, 7834 CF Hawn Freeway, Dallas, TX 75217. Rep; Kristi Gibbs – 816-729-4006.

a. PCT-1, Marazzi: Basalto

1) Color: BT28 Lava 2) Dimension: 24” x 48” x 3/8” 3) Grout Color: Mapei - #47 Charcoal 4) Grout Joint: 3/16” 5) Finish: Natural 6) Joint Type: Full/Flush 7) Installation: In accordance with manufacturers written instructions

2. Daltile; 7834 C.F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, TX 75217, 1-800-933-DALTILE; Elizabeth Moon (816-216-2890)

a. CT-1, Daltile - Matte

1) Color: #X714 Matte Desert 2) Dimension: 6” x 6” 3) Grout Color: Mapei - #02 Pewter 4) Joint Type: Full/Flush 5) Installation: In accordance with manufacturers written instructions

2.2 STONE THRESHOLDS

A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces.

1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.

B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.

1. Match Architect's sample for color and finish.


09 30 00-3 TILING

2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANES

A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10 and the descriptions in this Article.

1. Waterproofing Membrane: Manufacturer’s standard proprietary product consisting of either 1-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for trowel application or a high solids acrylic latex additive and cement-based powder or a liquid applied acrylic polyurethane dispersion.

2. Install at all floor locations to receive tile products. 3. Install at all shower wall locations to receive tile products.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the under all tile and stone:

1. Bostik: Hydroment Ultra-Set. 2. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller): Triple Flex, TA-324. 3. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller): Hydraflex. 4. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by

Addendum during bidding period.

2.4 CRACK SUPPRESSANT MEMBRANES

A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.12 and the descriptions in this Article.

B. Crack Suppressant Membrane: Manufacturer’s standard proprietary product consisting of either 1-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for trowel application or a high solids acrylic latex additive and cement-based powder or a liquid applied acrylic polyurethane dispersion.

1. Install at all floor locations to receive tile products as needed over movement, construction, and saw-cut joints, not to include expansion joints. Install over all non structural surface cracking.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following under all tile and stone:

1. Bostik: Hydroment Ultra-Set. 2. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller): Triple Flex, TA-324. 3. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller): Hydraflex 4. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


2.5 SEALERS

A. General: Provide water-based, flouro-chemical products.

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s invisible penetrating sealer, providing maximum stain resistance for all interior and exterior grout joints. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Install at all wet locations to receive tile products per manufacturer’s instructions. Protect and mask off surfaces not intended for sealing.

2. After installation, clean as recommended by manufacturer, removing excess sealer and residue.


09 30 00-4 TILING

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for all tile and stone grout joints:

1. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller): Guard All. 2. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Transition Strips: For connection to all tile, slate and linoleum, provide Schluter-Systems L.P. metal transition strips as noted below or otherwise indicated on drawings. Note that model numbers listed on drawings shall override if listed differently.

1. Ceramic Tile to Ceramic Tile (outside corner transitions): Model Schiene E 60 or E 45. Size shall be verified by installer and consistent with tile thickness. See detail drawing.

2. Carpet Flooring to Concrete Flooring: Model RENO-U. See detail drawing 3. Material/Finish: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards unless

otherwise indicated on drawings. 4. Installer shall confirm correct sizing of all transition strips in accordance with adjacent material

thickness and field conditions. 5. Note that tile installer shall provide and install transition strips for all locations listed above. 6. Note that leveling compound shall be added over all transition strip sections where

required to flush-out two adjacent materials. Extent and type of leveling compound shall be as required for different floor finishes used.

2.7 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive Product: Provide products to comply with ANSI A136.1.

1. Wall Tiles, smaller than 12” x 12”:

a. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) Double Duty b. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


2. Wall Tiles, 12” x 12” and larger, including weight up to 6 lbs. per square foot:

a. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) Double Duty Plus. b. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


B. Water-Cleanable, Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. (At all vertical tiled surfaces in kitchens and food prep areas.)


09 30 00-5 TILING

C. Latex-Portland Cement Modified Mortar: ANSI A118.4. (For all other tiled areas.) Product includes Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.

1. Wall Tile installed over waterproof membranes, large format wall tile weighing up to 6 lbs. per square foot:

a. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) Non-Sag mortar, #3N1. b. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


2. Floor Tile:

a. Bostik: Hydroment “PM”. b. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) – Superflex 392. TEC Specialty Products (H.B.

Fuller) – Full Flex TA 390. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) – Medium Bed mortar, #3N1.

c. TEC Specialty Products (H.B. Fuller) – 1Flex. d. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by


2.8 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3

a. Mapei; Kerapoxy CQ b. Other equivalent products may be accepted if and as specifically approved by Architect by

Addendum during bidding period. c. All grout materials shall be placed/installed per manufacturers written instructions. d. Color: See Products Section

2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturer's instructions.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where tile will be installed for conditions affecting performance. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from films and curing compounds.

B. Verify that installation of items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: ANSI 108 and TCA methods indicated in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."


09 30 00-6 TILING

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Cut and drill tile without marring surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern and provide uniform joint widths. Align joints when adjoining tiles and trim are same size. Center tile fields in both directions in each space or wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets.

E. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

F. Joints: Locate expansion, contraction and isolation joints during installation. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. If location of joints is not indicated, provide joints as recommended by referenced tile standards.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates, but in no instance shall joint spacing exceed 25’ in any interior direction. Coordinate location with Architect. Consult architect for joint placement on interior placements in direct sunlight o moisture and on exterior installations. See TCA (Tile Council of America) 2005 – EJ171-05 detail – ANSI 3.4.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3. Install sealant joint at all interior corners where tile occurs on adjacent walls. See Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants” for sealant type required.

3.3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install membrane to comply with Manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. Install any surface prep and primer products as required by manufacturer to improve installation of membrane.

B. Do not install tile until membrane has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.4 CRACK SUPPRESSANT MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install membrane to comply with Manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. Install any surface prep and primer products as required by manufacturer to improve installation of membrane.

B. Do not install tile until membrane has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.


09 30 00-7 TILING

3.5 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Walls: W243 or W244. 2. Floors: F122-5K or F125A-05. 3. Floors at Kitchens or with epoxy grout: F131-5K.


A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tiles.

B. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation.

C. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner that insures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



09 51 13-1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

1. GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lay-in Acoustical panel ceilings. 2. Metal suspension systems. 3. Aluminum louver lenses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully installed acoustical ceilings similar to those indicated for Project.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 and ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. Flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 450 or less.

C. Fire-Resistance Rating: ASTM E 119. Provide 1-hour rated ceiling panels and suspension system.

1. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements for rated assembly.

D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them.


A. Deliver ceiling units in original, unopened packages. Allow units to reach room temperature before installation. Handle carefully to avoid chipping edges.


A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until wet-work and work above ceiling is completed, and temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained.



1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish ceiling tiles and suspension system components in quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. The Drawings are based ceiling panel types from one manufacturer as listed below. Another approved manufacturer's system(s) which is/are similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable if specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period. Alternates must be submitted no later than 48 hours prior to bid date and time. The drawings are based on the following:

a. APC- 1 Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Dune #1775, 24" x 24" x 5/8", angled tegular lay-in for 9/16" grid. Color: white

b. APC - 2 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Optima 24” x 60”, square tegular for 9/16” grid – factory fabricated – see ceiling plan for location

2. Other Approved Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rockfon/Roxul Corporation c. USG Interiors, Inc. d. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

Products must be presented to Architect 48 hours prior to bid date.

2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Narrow-Face, Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: ASTM C 635. Roll formed from pre-painted or zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, 9/16 inch wide, metal caps on flanges; intermediate-duty system.

1. Color: White.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: ASTM C 635. Roll-formed from pre-painted or zinc coated cold rolled steel sheet, 15/16 inch-wide, metal caps on flanges; intermediate-duty system.

1. Color: White.

C. Fire-Resistance-Rated, Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: ASTM C 635. Roll-formed from pre-painted or zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, 15/16 inch-wide, metal caps on flanges; intermediate-duty system.

1. Color: White.



D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Rockfon/Roxul Corporation 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

Products must be presented to Architect 48 hours prior to bid date.

E. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.

F. Wire for Hangers and Ties: Size for 3 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Minimum 0.106-inch diameter (12 gauge).

G. Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard aluminum moldings and trim.

H. When acoustic panels must be cut to install a recessed light or speaker or where it is necessary to surface apply a fire alarm device or thermostat or similar item, the panel should be reinforced by gluing a full size piece of ½” type “X” gypsum drywall to the back surface of the panel.

2.3 ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Aluminum Louvers: At light coves, in locations as noted on the drawings, provide ½” x ½” x ½” Aluminum louvers with all appropriate trim as required for a complete installation.

1. Color: White. 2. Color: Silver.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ALP Lighting Components, Inc. (800) 545-6176. 2. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts for compliance with requirements specified.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.



B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half- width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 636, manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure. Splay hangers only where required to miss objects. Offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means.

C. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum interfere with required spacing of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck or deck tabs.

E. Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends.

F. Install edge moldings where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.

G. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.

H. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

B. If tiles are removed after initial installation to accommodate work by other trades, clean and reset all tiles that have been disturbed.

C. Any and all acoustic panels requiring field trimming/cutting shall have cut edge repainted with manufacturer-provided coating including instructions on method.



09 65 00-1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. See Section 09 30 00 “Tiling”. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other

accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 3. See Section 09 68 13 “Tile Carpeting”.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rubber Sheet Flooring

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. Install per manufacturer’s instructions, avoiding installation of smaller than half-sized tiles.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of flooring indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of flooring required.

E. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Maintenance Data: For each type of flooring to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Test Data: Provide a letter confirming that the concrete substrate meets all specified requirements prior to commencing with floor finish installation. Include in letter, documentation of test results showing passing results.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated.



1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.


A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers.

B. Store flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store flooring on flat surfaces.

1. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive flooring during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation.

E. Install floor covering after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

F. Concrete shall have cured no less than 90 days prior to installation of any floor covering. Installation of floor covering on concrete cured less than 90 days shall be at risk of Contractor and shall be replaced if adhesive failure occurs after installation.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Install flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



B. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive. See manufacturers requirements for slab moisture testing and procedure.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed but not less than 5% of each color provided.

2. Resilient Flooring: Furnish 5% or overall quantity, of each type, color, and pattern of flooring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. RSF-1: Mohawk; 160 South Industrial Blvd., Calhoun, GA (800) 554-6637

a. Product: True MediFlex TRS2 b. Colorway: #33 Dried Coral c. Installation: Install with strict accordance to manufacturer’s written instruction. d. Note: See Flooring Design sheets e. See Finishes Schedule

2. RSF-2: Mohawk; 160 South Industrial Blvd., Calhoun, GA (800) 554-6637

a. Product: True MediFlex TRS2 b. Colorway: #83 Gunmetal c. Installation: Install with strict accordance to manufacturer’s written instruction. d. Note: See Flooring Design sheets e. See Finishes Schedule

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile or sheet goods and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. RFT Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.



c. Resilient Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

2. All adhesives shall comply with manufacturer's written instructions and specifications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.



G. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives.

H. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring.

B. Lay out flooring from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half at perimeter.

1. Lay flooring in pattern indicated.

C. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

D. See Wall base condition and detail.

E. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend flooring to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

G. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere flooring to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with manufacturer’s directions to substrate producing a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor, install flooring before these items are installed.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of flooring.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. Do not wash floor until after time period

recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 4. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish

date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer.

C. Protect flooring products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: No floor polish required. Consult manufacturers written instructions for finish surface care.

E. Cover flooring until Substantial Completion, protecting flooring against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



09 65 13-1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 09 65 13 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.




A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE


1. Johnsonite

2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Flexco. 4. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length







F. Coordinate "Outside Corners" and "Inside Corners" paragraphs below with "Resilient Base Installation" Article.

1. Outside Corners: Job-formed 2. Inside Corners: Job-formed

G. Colors: 1. RB-1 = Johnsonite/Tarkett #TBD

H. Other equivalent products may be used only if specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period. Products must be submitted to Architect no less than 48 hours prior to bid date/time.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Resilient base shall not be applied to toekicks, Typical. See drawings for toekick finish.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.



F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).



E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



09 68 13-1 TILE CARPETING

SECTION 09 68 13 – TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. See Section 09 30 00 “Tile”. 2. See Section 09 65 13 “Resilient Base”.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Carpet Tile 2. Installation and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following.

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. 11. INSTALL carpet tile per manufacturer’s written instructions, avoiding installation of

smaller than half-sized tiles.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch long Samples.

D. Test Data: Provide a letter confirming that the concrete substrate meets all specified requirements prior to commencing with floor finish installation. Include in letter, documentation of test results showing passing results.



E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

H. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. 2. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling”.

B. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers.

C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated protected area. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F at least three days prior to installation.



1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation”.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Concrete shall have cured no less than 90 days prior to installation of any carpet. Installation of carpet on concrete cured less than 90 days shall be at risk of Contractor and shall be replaced if adhesive failure occurs after installation.

D. Clean all floor surfaces as required by manufacturer to adequately prepare for carpet installation.

1. Remove any and all oil deposits on concrete surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODULAR CARPET TILE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

B. CPT-1: Bentley Mills, Ali Skilling, (913) 387-7667

1. Product: Disruptor #4DR24 2. Size: 18” x 36” 3. Color: Particles #401451 4. Installation Method: As Drawn

C. CPT-2: Bentley Mills, Ali Skilling, (913) 387-7667

1. Product: Teleport #4TR24 2. Size: 18” x 36” 3. Color: Meta #401461 4. Installation Method: As Drawn

D. CPT-3: Bentley Mills, Ali Skilling, (913) 387-7667

1. Product: TBD 2. Size: TBD 3. Color: TBD 4. Installation Method: As Drawn

E. CPT-4: Interface, Katie Allen, (816) 673-5771

1. Product: Walk the Plank 2. Size: 25cm x 1m 3. Color: TBD 4. Installation Method: As Drawn

F. All individual carpet types for the entire project shall be from the same dye lot. Mixing of dye lots will not be allowed for any carpet type.

1. At the Architects request, invoices verifying dye lot consistency of all carpet tile and carpet rolls may be requested.

G. Alternate Manufacturers;

1. Shaw Inc.: 616 E Walnut Ave., Dalton, GA 30720, 800-441-7429 2. Mannington Inc.: 1844 US Highway 41 SE, Calhoun, GA 30701, 800-241-2262 3. Mohawk Inc.: 160 S Industrial Blvd., Calhoun, GA 30701, 800-554-6637

H. Other equivalent products may be used only if specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period. Products must be submitted to Architect no less than 48 hours prior to bid date/time.



2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Transition Strips: For connection to all concrete, vinyl tile and linoleum, provide Schluter-Systems L.P. metal transition strips as noted below or otherwise indicated on drawings. Note that model numbers listed on drawings shall override if listed differently.

1. Carpet to Concrete: Model RENO-U. Verify height required. 2. Carpet to RSF: Model Schiene-E, E 45. Verify height required. 3. Material/Finish: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards unless

otherwise indicated on drawings. 4. Note that carpet installer shall provide and install transition strips for all locations listed above. 5. Note that leveling compound shall be added over all transition strip sections where

required to flush out two adjacent materials. Extent and type of leveling compound shall be as required for different floor finishes used.

B. Subfloor Leveling Strips: Where required to raise carpet height to adjacent finishes such as slate, stone, etc. provide Johnsonite 12” leveling strips.

1. Height Transition: 0” to +1/4” unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing.

D. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and non-staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet. Installation Method: Double-Faced Tape Adhesive by carpet tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Level the floor to the standards outlined in the American Concrete Institute specifications for Concrete Building ACI 301 in regards to troweled finish and finishing tolerances. Leveling compounds must be Portland-based cement.

4. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Patch cracks and holes with a cement-based compound, compliant with carpet manufacturer’s requirements; installed per manufacturer’s specifications and instructions for use.


3.2 PREPARATION



A. General: Comply with CRI 2009, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. Refer to ASTM E1155-96 (2008).

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by broadloom carpet, carpet cushion, and carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides; apply sealer to prevent dusting immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting.

F. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.

1. In the event of conflict between the CRI Standard and those of the carpet tile manufacturer, the installer will follow Bentley Installation Instructions for carpet tile with NextStep backing.

2. All carpet tiles must be removed from the cartons and allowed to adjust to the job site temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.

3. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

4. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

5. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on sub-floor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

6. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 7. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. 8. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with carpet manufacturer's instructions. Butt

edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.

9. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. 10. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill

seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES



A. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures where required. Tightly adhere to substrate with adhesive. Install reducer strips at exposed edges.

B. Place carpet edge guard tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of carpet which would otherwise be exposed.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. No Adhesive-backed plastic permitted.

C. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations”.

1. Curling Adhesives—Traffic over field-applied adhesive installations shall be restricted for a minimum of 24 – 48 hours to allow adhesives to cure properly. Premature trafficking can cause installation failure. Restrict carpet exposure to water from cleaning or other sources for a minimum of 30 days.

2. Materials for Protection—Protect the finished floor covering from soil or paint, or if additional work is to be done after the installation, by covering it with a non-staining building material paper. Protect the installation from rolling traffic by using sheets of hardboard or plywood in potentially affected areas.

a. CAUTION: Do not place plastic sheeting over any carpet installation because it may prevent a slip hazard and may leave residue that result in rapid soiling after removal. In addition, it may trap moisture, which may promote mold growth, and retard adhesive curing.

3. Maintain Temperature—Do not allow the temperature of indoor carpeted areas to fall below 50° F (10° C), regardless of the age of the installation.



09 91 23-1 INTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. Gypsum board.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer’s best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified.




A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Colors: Match Existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth

F. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.

G. Spray Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry.



H. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable in writing to topcoat manufacturers.

6. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place and all areas as specified herein. Extend paint finishes in these areas as required. If color is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of unsealed areas in first coat appears.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

G. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment including all mechanical equipment and materials.

H. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. Painting is required on all new items included in the work.

I. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

J. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

E. Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

LOCATION SHEEN PAINT SYSTEM Interior Gypsum Drywall Flat GDW-21 Interior CMU/Concrete Semi-Gloss CMU-21 Interior Ferrous Metal Semi-Gloss FM-31 Interior Concrete Slabs (Mech. Room Flrs) CONC-1 Interior Gypsum Drywall Eggshell GDW-31 Interior Gypsum Drywall Semi-Gloss GDW-41 Note: Refer to Finishes Legend for all Hue number/names.

3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. System GDW-21 for application on Interior Gypsum Drywall Ceilings:

1. Flat Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over primer.



2. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Primer recommended for substrate listed. b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Primer/Flat Finish, DF-1591. c. Kwal: “Envirokote” Primer, 08300. d. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Primer, Z9165. e. PPG Paints: “Pure Performance” Interior Latex Primer, 9-900 Series. f. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28 Series. g. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Primer, B11W900.

3. Flat Latex Paint: Latex-based paint for use as a flat finish over prime-coated gypsum drywall.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Low Odor Interior Latex Flat. b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, DF-1591. c. Kwal: “Envirokote” Flat Low Odor, 1210. d. Moore: Pristine ECO-Spec” Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, 219. e. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Flat, Z9100 Series. f. PPG Paints: “Pure Performance” Interior Flat Latex, 9-100 Series. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat, B30 Series. h. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series.

B. System CMU-21 for application on Interior Concrete/CMU:

1. Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils excluding filler coat.

2. High Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy Duty latex block filler used for filling open textured interior concrete masonry block before application of top coats:

a. ICI: Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler, 5317. b. Iowa Paint: Prime Line Acrylic Block Filler, 3008. c. Kwal: Accu-Pro Latex Block Filler, 5890. d. PPG: SpeedHide Acrylic Block Filler, 6-15 Series. e. S-W: ProMar Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25.

3. Interior Semi-Gloss Odorless Latex Enamel: 2 coats of Low odor, semi-gloss, enamel for use over a primer on concrete and masonry.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss recommended for substrate listed.

b. ICI: “Lifemaster 2000” Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, LM9200. c. Iowa Paint: “Enviro Clean” Semi-gloss, 5300. d. Kwal: “Envirokote” Semi Gloss, 3310. e. Moore: “Pristine ECO-Spec” Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss. f. PPG: “Pure Performance” Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 9-500 Series. g. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series.



C. System GDW-31 for application on Interior Gypsum Drywall

1. Eggshell Latex Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer. 2. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall

under a eggshell latex paint.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Primer recommended for substrate listed. b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Primer/Flat Finish, DF-1591. c. Kwal: “Envirokote” Primer, 08300. d. Moore: “Pristine ECO-Spec” Primer, 231. e. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Primer, Z9165. f. PPG Paints: “Pure Performance” Interior Latex Primer, 9-900 Series. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28 Series. h. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Primer, B11W900.

3. Eggshell Latex Enamel: Latex-based paint for use as an eggshell finish over prime-coated gypsum drywall.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell recommended for substrate listed.

b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell, DE-1591. c. Kwal: “Envirokote” Eggshell, 2510. d. Moore: “Pristine ECO-Spec” Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell, 223. e. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Eggshell, Z9200 Series. f. PPG: “Pure Performance” Interior Eggshell Latex, 9-300 Series. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eggshell, B20 Series. h. S-W: ”Harmony” Interior Latex Eggshell, B9 Series.

D. System FM-31 for application on Interior Ferrous Metal:

1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. 2. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on

the interior under alkyd gloss enamels:

a. Devoe: Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, 14920 Red. b. ICI: Devguard Multi-Purpose Metal Primer, 4160. c. Iowa Paint: Meta Kote Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer White, 1064. d. Kwal: Rust Inhibiting Metal Primer, 9210. e. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint, 163. f. PPG: Speedhide Inhibitive Metal Primer, 6-208. g. S-W: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer, B50NZ6 / B50WZ1.

3. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous metal under an interior full-gloss alkyd enamel:

a. Devoe: Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat, 8801. b. ICI: UltraHide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel, 1516. c. Iowa Paint: Prime Line Alkyd Enamel Undercoat, 501. d. Kwal: AccuPro Int/Ext Alkyd Gloss Enamel, 9800. e. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody, 217.



f. PPG: SpeedHide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, 6-1110 Series. g. S-W: Industrial Enamel, B-54Z Series.

4. Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on interior ferrous surfaces:

a. Devoe: Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel, 70XX. b. ICI: UltraHide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel, 1516. c. Iowa Paint: Meta Kote Alkyd Urethane Gloss, 480 Series. d. Kwal: AccuPro Int/Ext Alkyd Gloss Enamel, 9800. e. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel, 133. f. PPG: SpeedHide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, 6-1110 Series. g. S-W: Industrial Enamel, B-54Z Series.

E. System CONC-1 for application on Interior High Traffic and Mechanical Floors:

1. Concrete Primer: Concrete primer for use over cured concrete.

a. Application Rate per manufacturer’s instructions:

1) ICI: PrePrime Penetrating Sealer, 167. 2) PPG: Megaseal High Solids Clear Primer, 99-6639 Series. 3) Tnemec: Series 203 Primer. 4) Or equal by others if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during

bidding period.

2. Coved Base: Apply a 4” rolled radius cove to all floor wall/curb transitions.


1) ICI: Devthane Self-Priming Epoxy, 235. 2) PPG: Megaseal High Solids Mixed Primer, 99-6639 Series with Sumed Silica to

make cove base. 3) Tnemec: Series 237 Mortar. 4) Or equal by others if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during

bidding period.

3. Intermediate Coat for use over primed concrete.


1) ICI: BarRust Self-Priming Epoxy, 235. 2) PPG: Megaseal Self-Leveling Epoxy, 99-6680 Series. 3) Tnemec: Series 206.



4. Finish coat: 1 coat over intermediate coat and concrete primer. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards:


1) ICI: No 3rd coat required. 2) PPG: Megaseal High Performance Urethane, 99-6730 Series. 3) Tnemec: Series 291. 4) Or equal by others if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during

bidding period.

F. System GDW-41 for application on Interior Gypsum Drywall:

1. Semi-Gloss Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over primer. 2. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall

under a flat latex paint.

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Primer recommended for substrate listed. b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Primer/Flat Finish, DF-1591. c. Kwal: “Envirokote” Primer, 08300. d. Moore: “Pristine ECO-Spec” Primer, 231. e. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Primer, Z9165. f. PPG Paints: “Pure Performance” Interior Latex Primer, 9-900 Series. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28 Series. h. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Primer, B11W900.

3. Semi-Gloss Latex Finish:

a. Devoe: “WonderPure” Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss recommended for substrate listed.

b. DV: “Health-Kote” Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, DS-1591. c. Kwal: Envirokote Semi Gloss, 3310. d. Moore: Super Hide Zero Latex Semi-Gloss, 358. e. P & L: Pro-Hide Gold Interior Low Odor Latex Semi-gloss, Z9300 Series. f. PPG Paints: “Pure Performance” Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 9-500 Series. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss, B31 Series. h. S-W: “Harmony” Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series.



09 96 00-1 HIGH-PERFOMANCE COATINGS

SECTION 09 96 00 – HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates:

a. Steel. b. Galvanized metal.


1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing” for shop priming of structural steel with primers specified in this Section.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Indicate VOC content.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product data for Credit MR2 - Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Environmental Product Declarations: a. Environmental Product Declarations complying with LEED requirements.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 3 - Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Sourcing of Raw Materials: a. Documentation for products that comply with LEED requirements for leadership extraction

practices. Include the following:

1) Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating participation in an extended producer responsibility program and statement of costs.

2) Product data and certification for bio-based materials, indicating that they comply with requirements. Include statement of costs.

3) Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement of costs.



4) Receipts for salvaged and refurbished materials used for Project, indicating sources and costs.

5) Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement of costs.

6) Documentation for regional materials, indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material and costs of regional materials.

3. Product Data for Credit MR 4 - Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Material Ingredients: a. Documentation for products that comply with material ingredient reporting.

4. Product data for Credit EQ 2 – Low-Emitting Materials:

a. Documentation for interior paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system

indicating VOC content and general emissions evaluations showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

b. Documentation for adhesives, sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

c. Documentation for flooring indicating general emissions evaluations showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

d. Documentation for composite wood indicating composite wood evaluations showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicat

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area.

E. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who employs only persons trained and approved by special coatings manufacturer for applying special coatings systems indicated.

1. Qualifications of installers for special coatings system shall not be less than five years of experience installing specified items. Special coatings installer shall be manufacturer approved and have performed at least ten similar installations.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of coating. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and only within recommended limits.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.



2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used

do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

D. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the coatings specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.



D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. Alkyd primers are not permitted on high-performance-coated surfaces, typ.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. Alkyd primers are not permitted on high-performance-coated surfaces, typ.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used.

B. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. a. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

D. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

E. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.

F. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the manufacturer’s directions, sand between applications to produce a smooth, even surface.




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

E. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly coated finishes.

3.6 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility.

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

3. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 4. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content of not more than 250

g/L. 6. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 8. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 9. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.



C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing 1 or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS SCHEDULE

LOCATION SHEEN COATINGS SYSTEM

Exterior Ferrous Metal Semi-Gloss EFM-3X Interior Ferrous Metal - Handrails Semi-Gloss IFM-3X GPDW (PTE-X) Semi-Gloss GDW-311 CMU/Concrete Eggshell CMU-301 CMU/Concrete Semi-Gloss CMU-311



3.7 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS

A. System EFM-3X for application on Exterior Ferrous Metal—Solid Color:

1. Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic : 2 finish coats over an organic primer. (Primer to be applied by metal fabricator in shop.)

2. Touch-Up Metal Primer: Organic primer used on exterior ferrous metal surfaces shall be touch-up primed as required if pre-primed steel is used, typical and applied per manufacturer’s specifications. Alkyd primers are not permitted on high-performance coated surfaces, typ.

a. Thickness: 2.5-3.5 mils. b. PPG Paints: Amercoat 68HS Organic Zinc-Rich Primer. c. SW: Corothane I Galvapac. d. Tnemec: Tneme-Zinc 90-97. e. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect.

3. Metal Primer: Organic primer used on exterior ferrous metal surfaces shall be full-prime coated. Typical and applied per manufacturer’s written specifications. Alkyd primers are not permitted on high-performance coated surfaces, typ.

a. Thickness: 2.5 – 3.5 mils. b. PPG Paints: Amercoat 68HS Organic Zinc-Rich Primer . c. Tnemec: Tneme-Zinc 90-97. d. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect.

4. Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Weather-resistant opaque coat for use over primed, ferrous metal surfaces:

a. Thickness: 3 – 4 mils. b. PPG Paints: Amercoat 450 HSG Semi-Gloss Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane. c. SW: Acrolon 218 High Solids Polyurethane – Semi-Gloss, B67W00651. d. Tnemec: Endura-Shield II, Series 73. e. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect.

3.8 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS

A. System IFM-3X for application on Interior Ferrous Metal—Handrails - LEED Compliant:

1. Semi-Gloss DTM: 2 finish coats over an fluoro-polymer primer. (Primer to be applied by metal fabricator in shop.)

2. Metal Primer: Direct to Metal Acrylic primer used to touch-up primed interior ferrous metal surfaces. Alkyd primers are not permitted on high-performance-coated surfaces, typ.

a. Thickness: 2 to 4 mils. b. PPG Paints: PittTech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer, 90-912. c. Tnemec: Series 115 Uni-Bond DF Primer. d. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect.



3. Semi-Gloss DTM: Opaque coat for use over primed, ferrous metal surfaces: Solid color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

a. Thickness: 1.5 – 1.6 mils per coat. b. PPG Paints: PittTech Satin Industrial Enamel, 90-474. c. Tnemec: Series 1029 Enduratone. d. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect.

B. System GDW-311 for application on Interior Gypsum Drywall:

1. Semi-Gloss Water-based two-component Acrylic Urethane Finish: One (1) intermediate coat and One (1) finish coat over primer.

2. Waterborne Primer/Sealer: Waterborne primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a waterborne acrylic urethane finish.

a. Thickness: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats.

b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—Primemaster Primer/Sealer. c. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

3. Intermediate Coat—Semi-Gloss Water-based Acrylic Urethane: Opaque coat for use over primed, interior gypsum drywall surfaces: Scrub Test = 12,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Semi-Gloss. Color as selected by Architect:

a. Application: Spray or roll finish to completely cover primer and according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Apply in a continuous, even film at manufacturer’s specified coverage rate.

b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—ScrubTough MAX ST11350. c. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

4. Finish Coat—Eggshell Water-based Acrylic Urethane: Opaque coat for use over intermediate coat, for application on interior gypsum drywall surfaces. Scrub Test = 12,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Semi-Gloss. Color as selected by Architect:



C. System CMU-301 for application on Interior Concrete/CMU:

1. Eggshell Water-based two-component Acrylic Polyurethane Finish: One (1) intermediate coat and 1 finish coat over primer.



2. Waterborne Primer/Sealer: Waterborne primer coating used on interior concrete/CMU under a waterborne acrylic urethane finish.


b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—Primemaster Primer/Sealer.

c. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

3. Intermediate Coat— Eggshell Water-based Acrylic Polyurethane: Opaque coat for use over primed, interior concrete/CMU surfaces: Scrub Test = 8,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Eggshell. Color as selected by Architect:


b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—ScrubTough ST10416.


4. Finish Coat—Eggshell Water-based Acrylic Polyurethane: Opaque coat for use over intermediate coat, for application on interior concrete/CMU surfaces. Scrub Test = 8,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Eggshell. Color as selected by Architect:


b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—ScrubTough ST10416. c. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period.

D. System CMU-311 for application on Interior Concrete/CMU:

1. Semi-Gloss Water-based two-component Acrylic Polyurethane Finish: One (1) intermediate coat and One (1) finish coat over primer.

2. Waterborne Primer/Sealer: Waterborne primer coating used on interior concrete/CMU under a waterborne acrylic urethane finish.


b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—Primemaster Primer/Sealer.




3. Intermediate Coat—Semi-Gloss Water-based Acrylic Polyurethane: Opaque coat for use over primed, interior concrete/CMU surfaces: Scrub Test = 12,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Semi-Gloss. Color as selected by Architect:


b. Scuffmaster: Master Coating Technologies—ScrubTough MAX ST11350.


4. Finish Coat—Semi-Gloss Water-based Acrylic Polyurethane: Opaque coat for use over intermediate coat, for application on interior concrete/CMU surfaces. Scrub Test = 12,000 scrub cycles per ASTM D 2486. Finish/Sheen—Semi-Gloss. Color as selected by Architect:





10 11 00 - 1 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

1. GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of visual display boards:

1. Magnetic glass markerboards (for liquid chalk). 2. Glass markerboards (for liquid chalk). 3. Cork Tack Boards 4. Accessories—Eraser Tray

B. See Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:

1. Markerboards: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual samples of dry-erase finish for markerboards.

2. Glass Markerboards: Manufacturer's actual samples of dry-erase finish for tempered glass magnetic markerboards.

3. Glass Markerboards: Manufacturer's actual samples of dry-erase finish tempered glass markerboards.

4. Cork Tackboards: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual samples of cork tackboards. 5. Map & Display Rail System: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual samples of tackable

cork surface materials. 6. Accessories: Samples of each finish type and color.


A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Coordinate fabrication with construction to avoid delay.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Markerboard Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

B. Magnetic Glass Markerboard Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Clarus Glassboards, LLC., 8715 Harmon Road, Fort Worth, TX 76177. Phone: (888) 813-7414. Fax: (682) 626-5344. www.clarusglassboards.com

a. KS & MO Sales Reps: Mercury Contract Resource, 6330 Morningside Drive, Kansas City, MO 64113. Eva Rasmussen and Maggie Goss. Phone: (816) 520-1667, (816) 377-2735.

2. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during Bidding Period. Alternates must be submitted no later than 48 hours prior to bid date and time.

C. Tackboard Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Claridge, mounted cork tackboards. Dimensions; See drawings

a. Claridgecork color: TBD from standard colors b. Sales Rep: Jennifer Shoemaker, (402) 202-7073, [email protected]. c. Sales Rep: University Publishing, 1700 W. O Street, Suite B, Lincoln, NE 68528, (402)

474-7300, Fax: (402) 474-7329. d. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during Bidding Period.

Alternates must be submitted no later than 48 hours prior to bid date and time.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Magnetic Glass Markerboards: Clarus Glassboards™, factory-built, Frameless, Tempered Glass, dry-erase writing surface with polished edges and eased corners.

1. Writing Surface: 1/4” PPG Starfire Tempered Safety Writing Glass. 2. CUSTOM Color: To match adjacent wall color as noted on drawings. 3. Back: Metal. 4. Mounting Method/Hardware: Concealed mounting with Clarus Float Hardware applied to

Glassboard. All hardware supplied by Clarus. 5. Magnetic Marker Board/Accessory Tray: Clarus Magnetic Box Tray. 12” W x 2-1/4” D x 1-3/4”

H. Finish—Satin Silver, F100. Installation: Magnetic. 6. Wall-Mounted Marker Board/Accessory Tray: Clarus T Tray. 12” W x 2-3/4” D. Finish—

Anodized aluminum. Installation: Removable adhesive. 7. Surface-Mounted Marker Board/Accessory Tray: Clarus Curve Tray. 3” W x 1” D x 6-3/4” H.

Finish—Anodized aluminum. Installation: Manufacturer provided hardware (for installation on Wall surface) / Removable adhesive (for installation on Markerboard surface).

8. Recommended Markers: EXPO Bold Color Dry Erase Markers (EXPO Low-Odor Markers are NOT RECOMMENDED).

9. See Drawings for dimensions. 10. Provide 3 black micro-fiber towels 11. Provide wall-mounted towel holder

3. EXECUTION

http://www.clarusglassboards.com/




3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for a complete installation.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly.

B. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Break in units only as recommended by the manufacturer.



10 14 10 - 1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 10 - INTERIOR SIGNAGE

1. GENERAL



1. See Section 00 80 00 “Supplementary Conditions”, if included, for requirements relating to interpretation of the drawings and specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following types of signs:

1. ADA signage at Restrooms, Mechanical and Electrical Room Signage.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Include Manufacturer’s construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required.

C. Color Chart: Manufacturer’s Standard.


A. Single Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and graphics layout of signs and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.


A. Deliver components correctly packed to prevent damage.

B. Store in secure areas, out of weather and protected from work of other trades.

C. Handle IAW Manufacturer’s instructions.

1.6 WARRANTY



A. Provide Manufacturer’s standard warranty covering manufacturing defects for each particular product specified.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

1. Star Signs LLC, 801 E. 9th Street, Lawrence KS, 66044, 785.842.4892x103

a. Contact: Ms. Shelley Rosdahl

B. Materials involved include:

a. Background Panel Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors. b. Text Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors. c. Symbol Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Mounting Method for attachment to GPDW: Vinyl High-Bond Tape (VHB) as recommended by manufacturer for permanent installation.

3. Mounting Method for attachment to Glass (Sidelights): Vinyl High-Bond Tape (VHB), tape-mounted to glass with manufacturer provided SPM window backer for installation on glass.

4. Mounting Height: As indicated on the drawings. Install signs within the following tolerances and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at heights to conform to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and applicable local amendments and regulations.

a. Interior Signs: Within 1/4 inch vertically and horizontally of intended location.

5. Size: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Location: As indicated on the drawings. 7. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.

C. Text: To be provided by Owner/Architect as indicated on the drawings.

D. KDOT Logo/Seal sign

a. Back-print low iron ¼” plate glass with full color high res. image of the official seal graphic of the Kansas Department of Transportation. All colors shall match the graphic standards specified by State standards.

b. Sign design is depicted on F1.30

E. Font: As per State standards

1. Background Panel Color: As indicated on the drawings from Manufacturer’s standards. 2. Divider Panel Finish: To match directory. 3. Border Color: As indicated on the drawings form Manufacturer’s standards. 4. Text Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standards.



F. Mounting Method: 470SM, Surface Mount as shown on drawings.

G. Mounting Height: As indicated on the drawings.

1. Interior Signs: Within 1/4 inch vertically and horizontally of intended location.

H. Location: As indicated on the drawings.

I. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.

2.2 FINISHES

A. Laminated Polymer: Raised graphics with Braille 1/32” above surface with contrasting colors in finishes and color combinations as described in drawings.

a. Edge Condition: Square Cut, Return material as shown in drawings b. Corner Condition, Radius c. Mounting, Unframed d. Custom paint colors: match Pantone color matching system as selected by Architect.

B. Colors: As selected from the manufacturer’s standards.

C. Finishes shall be water-based, non-toxic, zero-emissions, high temperature cured.

2.3 TYPOGRAPHY REQUIREMENTS

A. Tactile and Braille copy: Manufacturers standard process for producing copy complying ADA Accessibility guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free of burrs and cut marks.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet or Photopolymer 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32”(.08mm) 3. For Grade B Braille copy, coordinate messages in conjunction with Graphic and Sign schedule.

Braille copy contained on drawings is for size and position only and shall not be used for full message.

4. Symbols and other ADA required symbols, Comply with all:(International Symbol of Accessibility; Symbol of Access for hearing loss; International TDD Symbol; and Symbol of Volume Control.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units where indicated, using mounting methods in compliance with the Manufacturer’s instructions.



B. All Glass-mount locations shall include solid white polymer back panel. Panel shall mount on back side of glass to conceal sign fasteners.

C. Cleaning and Protection: At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces IAW the Manufacturer’s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.



10 14 19 - 1 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 19 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast dimensional characters.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and

accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample 2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNS, GENERAL


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design sign structure and anchorage of dimensional character

B. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cast Characters shown on elevation – front entry: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI® Signage Innovations™, LPS Series. 2. Character Material: Precision-Cut Solid Aluminum Character Material: Cast aluminum



3. Character Height: 8” – verify with owner standards 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character 5. Finishes:

a. Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry finishes b. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full range of

industry colors and color densities

6. Mounting: Concealed studs/Projecting studs. 7. Typeface: owner standard font

B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.



6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



10 26 00-1 WALL PROTECTION

SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUEMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of wall surface protection systems:

1. Wall/Corner surface protection products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each wall surface protection system component and installation accessory.

B. Samples for initial selection by the Architect from the manufacturers full range of colors and textures.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: ASTM E 84. Flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 450 or less.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer.

B. Store wall surface protection materials inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather and soiling.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is enclosed and the ambient temperature is not less than 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours prior to installation.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work.

B. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than 2 percent of each type of wall surface protection materials and components.

2. PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. (ONLINE) The Corner Guard Store (www.thecornergaurdstore.com) 2. The C/S Group 3. Institutional Products Corporation 4. Pawling Corporation 5. Other, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding period. Equal

products must be submitted to Architect 120 hours prior to bid date/time.

2.2 MATERIALS



A. Stainless Steel: Type 304, stainless steel plate, minimum 0.06 inch (1.5 mm), No. 4 satin directional finish.

1. Surface Mounted Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Provide manufacturer's standard paper-covered satin finish, 0.059 inch (1.5 mm) minimum, stainless steel sheet corner guards, height as indicated. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated, and formed edges.

a. CG-2, C/S Group (Acrovyn) SCO, End wall corner guard or equal.

1) Profile: U-shape. 2) Corner Radius: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 3) Leg Size: 1” inch legs. 4) Corner Guard Height: SEE DRAWINGS 5) Material Gauge: 16 Stainless Steel. 6) Finish: Brushed/Satin Stainless Steel. 7) Mounting Method: Countersunk stainless steel screws with mounting holes 8 inches

(200 mm) on center.

b. CG-1, Stainless Steel, Corner guard or equal.

1) Profile: 90 degree. 2) Corner Radius: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 3) Leg Size: 1” inch legs. 4) Material Gauge: 16 Stainless Steel. 5) Finish: Brushed/Satin Stainless Steel. 6) Corner Guard Height: Full Height, Floor to Head of Opening. 7) Mounting Height: Bottom of Corner Guard to be installed at top of finished floor /

Bottom of Corner Guard to be installed at top of integral wall base. 8) Mounting Method: Countersunk stainless steel screws with mounting holes 8 inches

(200 mm) on center.

2. Mounting Height: Bottom of Corner Guard to be installed at top of finished floor.

2.3 ABUSE-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS

A. Abuse-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fabricated from semi-rigid, plastic sheet wall-covering material.

1. C/S Group (Acrovyn) 4000 High-Impact Wall Covering by The C/S Group, or equivalent product by other approved manufacturers.

a. TBD

2. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) or 48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm) sheet. 3. Sheet Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

Height: Wainscot, as indicated. 4. Caulk: Color-matched or clear caulk to match High-Impact Wall Covering WP-1 and WP-2 wall

covering, Typ.



2.4 INSTALLATION

A. Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

B. Install wall surface protection unit’s plumb, level, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work.

C. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2.5 CLEANING

A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean wall surface protection systems using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. Remove excess adhesive. Leave area of installation in clean, neat condition.



10 28 00 - 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Surface mounted Paper Towel Dispenser. 2. Wall mounted Soap Dispenser 3. Stainless Steel Surface-Mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser. 4. Stainless Steel Surface-mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal. 5. Grab Bar: Satin-Finish Stainless Steel, 1-1/2” (38 mm) diameter. 6. Underlavatory Guards. 7. Mop and Broom Holder (Custodial Accessories).


1. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Include electrical characteristics. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.



C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Georgia Pacific




2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Foundations Worldwide, Inc. 5. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

C. Georgia Pacific – Surface Mounted roll paper dispenser.

1. Dispenses 8 inches X 400 feet Rolls. 2. Provide Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building

owner/manager.

2.4 WALL MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER



1. Georgia Pacific 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

C. Bobrick – Surface Mounted soap dispenser: B-40, Classic Series

1. Two tone black and grey – Vandal resistant lid with keyless locking device, translucent container for visible soap level.

2. Provide Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner/manager.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE-MOUNTED MULTI-ROLL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER




period.

C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., ClassicSeries® Surface-mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser, Product #B-265.

2.6 STAINLESS STEEL SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL








period.

C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., ClassicSeries® Surface-mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal, Product #B-270.

1. Finish: Satin-Finish Type #304 Stainless Steel. Surface-mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal shall

be type 304 stainless steel with all welded construction, exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Install per manufacturer’s written instructions.

2.7 GRAB BARS




period.

C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Stainless Steel, 1-1/2” (38 mm) diameter Grab Bar with 2” Snap End Flange, Product #B-6806.99.

1. 18-gauge, 1-1/2” (38 mm) diameter grab bar. Clearance between the grab bar and wall shall be

1-1/2” (38 mm). Concealed mounting flanges shall be 1/8” (3 mm) thick stainless steel plate, 2” x 3-1/8” (50 x 80 mm), and equipped with two screw holes for attachment to wall. Flange covers shall be 22 gauge (0.8 mm), 3-1/4” (85 mm) diameter x 1/2” (13 mm) deep, and shall snap over mounting flange to conceal mounting screws and/or WingIt fasteners. Ends of grab bar shall pass through concealed mounting flanges and be heliarc welded to form one structural unit. Grab bar shall comply with barrier-free accessibility guidelines (including ADAAG in the U.S.A.) for structural strength. Finish: Satin-Finish Type #304 Stainless Steel. a. 18” Grab Bar: #B-6806.99x18 b. 36” Grab Bar: #B-6806.99x36. c. 42” Grab Bar: #B-6806.99x42.

2.8 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS



1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.








3. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding period.

C. Underlavatory Guard:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Handy-Shield Maxx 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct

contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.9 MOP AND BROOM HOLDER (CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES)



1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

C. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 2. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). 3. Hooks: Three. 4. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.








2.10 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



10 44 13 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Apply decals on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.



2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for standard 10 lb fire extinguisher.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch- (1.09-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: Backbend depth as required for wall depth. Coordinate with all wall types where cabinets are to be installed and note on Shop Drawings for Architects review.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180

degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Factory primed for field painting.






2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.


A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply decals, vinyl lettering at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



10 51 13- 1 METAL LOCKERS

SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal lockers and related equipment as indicated on drawings.

B. Types of products in this section include the following:

1. Staff/Employee Lockers.

C. Locations, types and configurations of lockers are indicated in the drawings and attached Locker Schedules.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and installation instructions for metal locker units.

B. Color Samples on squares of same metal to be used for fabrication of lockers.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, and storage.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

1.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Penco Products Vanguard (1 Tier) or comparable product by one of the following:




1. American Locker Security Systems, Inc. 2. De Bourgh Manufacturing Co. 3. List Industries Inc. 4. Lyon Metal Products Inc. 5. Medart, Inc. 6. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 7. Other equivalent product, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during bidding

period.

2.2 MATERIALS

B. Sheet Steel: Mild cold-rolled and leveled furniture steel, free from buckle, scale, and surface imperfections.

C. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel-plated steel; exposed bolt heads, slotless type; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.

D. Equipment: Hooks and hang rods of cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel.

2.3 STAFF/EMPLOYEE LOCKERS

E. Construction: Fabricate lockers square and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch.

1. Weld frame members together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Grind exposed welds flush. No bolts, screws, or rivets shall be used in assembly of locker body.

F. Tops, Bottoms, Shelves and Tier Dividers: Form tops, bottoms, shelves and tier dividers of solid 16-gage minimum steel sheet.

G. Backs: Form backs of 18-gage minimum steel sheet.

H. Sides and Intermediate Partitions: Form sides and intermediate partitions of 1" x 1" x 1/8" pickled steel angle with panels of 16 gage cold rolled sheet steel securely welded in place at intervals not to exceed 6 feet.

I. Door: One-piece, minimum 14-gage sheet steel, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees.

1. Ventilation: Provide perforated diamond-shaped pattern door face. 2. Hinges: Steel, full-loop, 5-knuckle, tight pin. Weld to inside of frame.

a. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door greater than 60 inches.

J. Handle and Latch: Stainless steel pan recessed into the door containing a finger lift mechanism constructed from 10 gage steel. Spring activated nylon slide latches encased in a steel latch channel to permit closing of door while the padlock or built-in lock is in position. Provide rubber bumpers riveted to door stops for silent operation.

1. Latching: 2-point latch with lock slip for locking with padlock.



K. Finishing: Apply baked-on enamel finish to all surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and nonferrous metal.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Concealed parts may be manufacturer's standard neutral color.

L. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown:

1. Lockers greater than 60" in height: Hat shelf, one double-prong hook and not fewer than 2 wall hooks.

M. Number Plates: Provide one aluminum number plate for each locker door with 3/8" black filled number in sequence as directed.

N. Continuous Metal Base: Where indicated, provide minimum 14 gage cold-rolled steel, welded, closed metal base. Factory- finish base to match lockers.

O. Continuous Sloping Tops and Filler Panels: Provide minimum 18 gage sloping tops with all infill, closure, end pieces, and concealed fasteners. Factory- finish base to match lockers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

P. Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation.

Q. Space fastenings about 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply through backup reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners.

R. Install trim and metal base using concealed fasteners. Provide flush, hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

S. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly.

T. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.



10 75 00- 1 FLAGPOLES

SECTION 10 75 00 - FLAGPOLES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to completely furnish and install the Flagpoles as indicated on the plans and as herein specified.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Ground-Set, Fixed, Cone Tapered Aluminum Flagpoles

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required.

B. Provide Shop Drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout, jointing and complete anchoring and supporting systems.


A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices.

B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a 90-mph wind velocity minimum when flying flag of appropriate size.

C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting, precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather-tight, hairline field joints.


A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other weather-tight wrapping and prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container.

B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling.

PART 2- PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal prior to bid opening.

1. Concord Industries, Inc. 2. Continental Flagpoles 3. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2.2 FLAGPOLE TYPES

D. Aluminum Flagpole: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, alloy 6063-T6, having a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch, tensile strength not less than 30,000 psi, and a yield point of 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and age-harden after fabrication.

1. Provide 1, 30’-0” tall exposed height concealed halyard cone-tapered aluminum flagpole

2.3 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING

E. Provide manufacturer's standard base system for the type of flagpole installation required.

F. Foundation Tube: For ground-set flagpoles, provide 16-gage minimum galvanized corrugated steel tube, or 12-gage rolled steel tube, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Furnish complete with welded steel bottom base and support plate, lightning ground spike, and steel centering wedges, all welded construction. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top for plumbing pole after erection. Galvanize steel parts after assembly, including foundation tube.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard flash collar, finished to match flagpole.

2.4 SHAFT AND FINIAL BALL FINISH

G. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.5 FITTINGS

H. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball to match pole butt diameter.

I. Truck: Cast Aluminum, internal halyard type, revolving non-fouling, equipped with two automotive-type sealed bearing, with one 2 ½” plated steel sheave

J. Internal Halyard System: Furnish pole with internal halyard system consisting of a manually operated, geared winch with control stop device and removable handle. Provide stainless steel braided aircraft-type cable and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counter balance and sling. Provide reinforced, flush access door, secured with cylinder lock.

K. Winch: Stainless steel, direct drive; mounted on a rotatable plate inside the shaft. Winch shall be accessible for operation and maintenance only through a single reinforced access opening, which shall be covered by a removable door finished to match shaft. Winch shall be gearless, operable only by a removable crank handle through the access opening, and shall lock in any position upon removal of



crank handle.

PART - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR GROUND-SET POLES

L. Excavation: Excavate for foundation concrete to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions. Remove wood, loose soil, rubbish, and other foreign matter from excavation; and moisten earth before placing concrete. Back fill open excavation after concreting with original excavated material.

M. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, and water mixed in proportions to attain 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi, complying with ASTM C 94.

N. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by use of vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days, or use a nonstaining curing compound in cold weather.

O. Finish trowel exposed concrete surfaces to smooth, dense surface. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter.

3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION

P. General: Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with accepted shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Provide positive lightning ground for each flagpole installation. 2. Paint below-grade portions of ground-set flagpole with heavy coat of bituminous paint.



12 24 13-1 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

SECTION 12 24 13 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

1. GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual clutch window shades. 2. Accessories and attaching hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of window shade specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics.

C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of window shade indicated.

D. Maintenance data for window shades to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining window shades and finishes. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and

performance.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide window shades identical to those tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Test Method: NFPA 701. 2. Rating: Pass.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of window shade from one source and by a single manufacturer.




A. Field Measurements: Check actual window shade dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install window shades until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

C. Install all shades no closer than 2” from glass surfaces. Provide minimum of 1/2” air space between either ceiling and top of shade or between side of shade and wall jambs.

D. Warranty:

1. MANUAL CLUTCH ROLLER WINDOW SHADES: Provide manufacturer’s standard twenty-five (25) year written warranty against defects in manual shade materials and workmanship, beginning at date of substantial completion. The control chain is considered a normal maintenance item and is not under warranty.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Manual Clutch Shades:

a. MechoShade, Manual Clutch System, 42-03 35th Street, Long Island City, NY 11101 (877) 774-2572. Sales Rep: Gary Hart, (816) 471-2559.

1) Distributor (MechoShade): Abbey-Simons, 320 West 80th Street, Kansas City, MO 64114, 816-363-3124

b. Draper Inc., FlexShade XD Manual Clutch System, 411 S. Pearl Street, Spiceland, IN 47385, (800) 238-7999 / (765) 987-7999, www.draperinc.com.

1) Kansas Sales Rep (Draper Inc.): Doug Ross, (765) 856-1281, [email protected].

2) Kansas City, Missouri Sales Rep (Draper Inc.): John Hutson, (765) 856-1277, [email protected].

3) Missouri Sales Rep (Draper Inc.): Ross Rhoades, (615) 904.7207, [email protected].

c. Hunter Douglas, RB 500 Shade System, PO Box 740, Two Park Way, Upper Saddle River, NJ 007458, (800) 727-8953, www.hunterdouglascontract.com. Sales Rep: David Cover, (253) 857-3920 (office) / (206) 295-2861 (cell), [email protected].

http://www.draperinc.com/




http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/




d. Lutron Shading Solutions by Vimco, Manual Clutch System, 7200 Suter Road, Coopersburg, PA 18036, (888) 588-7661, www.lutron.com.

1) Sales Rep: Brenda Golwitzer, (515) 554-4331, [email protected].

1. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

a. Bead Chains: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.

1) Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. 2) Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. 3) Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

a. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. c. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel in tube.

3. Installation Accessories: 4. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating

mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly

when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

5. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.

a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open.

6. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

7. For WIC2: Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.

8. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: Bronze




B. MATERIALS

1. Manual Clutch: Manufacturers standard manual clutch system for size of shade required. All manual clutch shades shall include a lift assist mechanism.

2. Bottom of control chain to be 48” AFF (in compliance with ADA height requirements), Typ. 2. Mounting brackets for motor end, idler end and center supports are .125 inch galvanized steel.

B. Controls:

1. Shades shall be operated individually or in groups by means of one or more double pole, double throw switches.

2. Shade manufacturer shall furnish all electrical control equipment, shades and accessories for a complete installation and single-source responsibility.

C. Accessories:

1. Intermediate Brackets: as required. 2. Chain Retainers: as required for child safety.

a. Basis of Design: MechoShade Standard Child-Safe Chain Retainer—Jamb Mount

D. Roller Tube shall be extruded aluminum of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to prevent excessive deflection along its length. The shade fabric will be spline-mounted to the roller to allow shade fabric to be removed from the roller without having to remove roller from the brackets. Adhesives, double-sided adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets applied for mounting of the fabric are not acceptable. A minimum of one turn of fabric will be placed on the roller before the working section of fabric starts.

1. Shades, 10 feet or more wide must have gear reduction lifting/clutch mechanism.

E. Hem Bar shall be either 1/8” x 1” or 3/16” x 1-1/2” extruded aluminum bar depending on size of shade, pocketed in lower end of fabric by thermal seal.

F. Shade retention systems may be required to maintain shade position where HVAC registers are directly in front of floor to ceiling windows.

G. Surface-mounted Single Shade Pocket shall be 4-3/4” wide by 5” high extruded aluminum enclosure with a 3” wide closure for use when the shade is to be recessed into the pocket or completely concealed. Surface-Mounted Roller Window Shades shall not be attached to the window system, Typ.

1. WIC-1 and WIC-2, Manual Clutch Rolling Shade: Equal to MechoShade Mecho/5 with Fascia and #4133 Surface-Mounted Ceiling Pocket.

2. Finish: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard color/finishes.



H. Shadecloth Materials

1. WIC-1 Vinyl jacketed polyester fabrics, 1% openness (See drawings for locations).

a. Style: Mechoshade SoHo 1100 Series (1% openness). Color: Thompson, 1112 (Charcoal).

b. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during Bidding Period. Alternates must be submitted no later than 48 hours prior to bid date and time.

2. WIC-2 Opaque Fiberglass Blackout Fabric: Blackout shading fabric shall be totally opaque, 14 mils thick PVC coated fiberglass, with 64 threads per square inch. Breaking strength will be 160 x 140 pounds and weight of 14 ounces per square yard. Fabric must be made of first quality materials with no pin holes, breaks or cracks. Must be washable and colorfast.

a. Style: Mechoshade Equinox 0100 Series. Color: 0711 Dark Grey. b. Or equal, if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during Bidding Period.

Alternates must be submitted no later than 48 hours prior to bid date and time.

I. Fire Retardance: The described woven fabrics have been tested by an approved laboratory and meet the minimum requirements established by the California State Fire Marshal, per California Administrative Code, Title 19, Public Safety, Sub-chapter 8, Article 4, Section 1237, paragraph (b) as amended in 1986 and as modified by the State Fire Marshal in subsequent discussions. They also pass the National Fire Protection Association Test #701, and shall be fade resistant to commercially accepted standards.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of window shades.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been met.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install window shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer’s written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. Surface-Mounted Roller Window Shades shall not be attached to the window system, Typ.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean window shade surfaces, according to manufacturer’s instructions, after installation.

B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure that window shades are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training.



12 36 61 - 1

SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface-material window stools, countertops and backsplashes.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top 1-1/2-inch laminated bullnose. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.


12 36 61 - 2

SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. LG Hausys. HiMacs b. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period.

2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a

precoated finish. 4. Colors and Patterns: #S006 Arctic White

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

1. Install backsplashes and end splashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard sub tops by saturating with varnish.





13 34 19 - 1

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

SECTION 13 34 19 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural-steel framing. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal wall panels. 4. Metal soffit panels. 5. Thermal insulation. 6. Accessories.


1. Section 08 36 13 "Sectional Doors." 2. Section 08 45 23 “Insulated Translucent Fiberglass Sandwich Panel Wall System”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology Standard: See MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.


A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Structural-steel-framing system. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal wall panels. 4. Metal liner panels. 5. Insulation and vapor retarder facings. 6. Flashing and trim. 7. Accessories.


A. Convene preinstallation meeting 2 weeks before start of installation of metal building system.


13 34 19 - 2


B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, Engineer, installer, and metal building system manufacturer’s representative.

C. Review materials, installation, protection, and coordination with other work.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location.

2. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

3. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners.

a. Show roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, and items mounted on roof curbs.

b. Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.

4. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. c. Downspouts.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finish.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Metal Panels: Nominal 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories.

2. Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Vapor-Retarder Facings: Nominal 6-inch- square Samples. 4. Accessories: Nominal 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory.

E. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement.

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Include details of fabrication and assembly of door hardware. Organize schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

2. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.


13 34 19 - 3


F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified erector, manufacturer, professional engineer and land surveyor.

B. Manufacturer Accreditation: Statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced by a manufacturer accredited according to the International Accreditation Service's AC472.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Metal Building System Certificates: For each type of metal building system, from manufacturer.

1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:

a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-

rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. g. Governing building code and year of edition. h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection,

wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).

i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code.

j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors.

E. Erector Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.

F. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation and vapor-retarder facings. Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, and water absorption.

H. Source quality-control reports.

I. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and the Contract Documents. Have surveyor who performed surveys certify their accuracy.

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


13 34 19 - 4



A. Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.

1. Accreditation: According to the International Accreditation Service's AC472. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis and Shop

Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who practices in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing surveying services of the kind indicated.

C. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain metal building system components, including primary and secondary framing and metal panel assemblies, from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

G. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.

H. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Structural load limitations. c. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials and erector's personnel, equipment,

and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. d. Required tests, inspections, and certifications. e. Unfavorable weather and forecasted weather conditions.

2. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Compliance with requirements for purlin and rafter conditions, including flatness and attachment to structural members.


13 34 19 - 5


b. Structural limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing. c. Flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and

condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. d. Temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after

installation. e. Roof observation and repair after metal roof panel installation.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Compliance with requirements for support conditions, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

b. Structural limitations of girts and columns during and after wall panel installation. c. Flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other

construction that will affect metal wall panels. d. Temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after

installation. e. Wall observation and repair after metal wall panel installation.


A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site

before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements:

1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions.


13 34 19 - 6


2. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports and roof penetrations, which are specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories."

C. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


2. Finish Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company. 2. Chief Buildings; Division of Chief Industries, Inc. 3. Nucor Building Systems.


13 34 19 - 7


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Butler Manufacturing Company or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Chief Buildings; Division of Chief Industries, Inc., Smart Series 2. Nucor Building Systems.

2.2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior.

1. Provide metal building system of size and with bay spacings, roof slopes, and spans indicated.

B. Primary-Frame Type:

1. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.

C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design load, and end-wall columns.

D. Secondary-Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed (bypass) girts.

E. Eave Height: As indicated on Drawings

F. Bay Spacing: As indicated on Drawings

G. Roof Slope: As indicated on Drawings

H. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard vertical-rib, standing-seam metal roof panels with field-installed insulation.

I. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard tapered-rib exposed-fastener and flat wall panel concealed-fastener metal wall panels with field-installed insulation.(REF. : SPECS FOR ALTERNATES)

2.3 METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Must Meet 2018 IECC Performance standards.

B. Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design loads with

deflections no greater than the following:

a. Main framing members: Vertical deflection of 1/240.


13 34 19 - 8


b. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. c. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. d. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. e. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span. f. Design secondary-framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and

construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.

3. Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than the following:

a. Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/240 of the building height.

4. Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.

C. Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

E. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.008 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.006 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a wind-load design pressure of not less than 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.

I. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.

2.4 STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing.

1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.

a. Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to comply with manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect.


13 34 19 - 9


2. Rigid Modular Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide interior columns fabricated from round steel pipes or tubes, or shop-welded, built-up steel plates.

3. Frame Configuration: One-directional sloped] 4. Exterior Column Type: Tapered, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 5. Rafter Type: Tapered.

B. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted assembly to comply with the following:

1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet.

2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes.

C. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating, to comply with the following:

1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.

a. Depth: As needed to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees from flange, with minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.

a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.

3. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.

4. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch- diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary-frame flanges.

5. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles. 6. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Purlin and Girt Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips fabricated from steel sheet. Provide

galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. 8. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from zinc-coated

(galvanized) steel sheet. 9. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or

structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

10. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

D. Canopy Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural-framing system, designed to withstand required loads; fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide frames with attachment plates and splice members, factory drilled for field-bolted assembly.

1. Type: Purlin-extension type


13 34 19 - 10


E. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:

1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end.

2. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads.

3. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.

4. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option.

F. Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.

G. Materials:

1. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

2. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

3. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 5. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. 6. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30

through 55, or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70.

7. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G60 coating designation; mill phosphatized.

8. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G90 coating designation.

b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80; with Class AZ50 coating.

9. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.

a. Finish: Plain.

10. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

a. Finish: Plain.

11. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

a. Configuration: Straight.


13 34 19 - 11


b. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. c. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. d. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. e. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C

12. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

a. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. b. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. c. Finish: Plain.

13. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

H. Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Apply primer to primary and secondary framing to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.

a. Prime secondary framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side.

2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer after phosphoric acid pretreatment. 3. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, gray oxide.

2.5 METAL ROOF PANELS

D. Metal Roof System: Butler Manufacturing “MR-24®” roof system.

E. Roof System Design: 1. Design roof panels in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-

Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Design roof paneling system for a minimum roof slope of 1/4 inch in 12 inches. 3. Design roof paneling system to support design live, snow, and wind loads. 4. Endwall Trim and Roof Transition Flashings: Allow roof panels to move relative to wall panels

and/or parapets as roof expands and contracts with temperature changes.

F. Roof System Performance Testing: 1. UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. 2. Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: Test roof system in accord-

ance with ASTM E 1592. 3. Roof system has been tested in accordance with U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Unified Facilities

Guide Specification Section 07 61 13. 4. FM Global (Factory Mutual):

a. Roof system has been tested in accordance with FMRC Standard 4471 and approved as a Class 1 Panel Roof.

b. Metal Building System Manufacturer: Provide specific assemblies to meet required wind rat-ing in accordance with FM Global.

c. Installation modifications or substitutions can invalidate FM Global approval.

G. Roof Panels: 1. Factory roll-formed, 24 inches wide, with 2 major corrugations, 2 inches high (2-3/4 inches including

seam), 24 inches on center.


13 34 19 - 12


2. Flat of the Panel: Cross flutes 6 inches on center, perpendicular to major corrugations in entire length of panel to reduce wind noise.

3. Variable Width Panels: a. For roof lengths not evenly divisible by the 2’-0” panel width, factory-manufactured variable-

width (9-inch, 12-inch, 15-inch, 18-inch, and 21-inch-wide) panels shall be used to ensure modular, weathertight roof installation.

b. Minimum Length: 15 feet. c. Supply maximum possible panel lengths.

4. Panel Material and Finish: a. 24-gauge steel coated both sides with layer of acrylic-coated Galvalume aluminum-zinc alloy

(approximately 55 percent aluminum, 45 percent zinc) applied by continuous hot-dip method. b. Minimum 0.55-ounce coated weight per square foot as determined by triple-spot test, ASTM

A 792. c. Apply clear acrylic film for additional protection.

5. Use panels of maximum possible lengths to minimize end laps. 6. Extend eave panels beyond structural line of sidewalls. 7. Factory punch panels at panel end to match factory-punched holes in eave structural member. 8. Panel End Splices: Factory punched and factory notched. 9. Panel End Laps: Locate directly over, but not fastened to, a supporting secondary roof structural

member and be staggered, to avoid 4-panel lap-splice condition. 10. End Laps: Floating. Allows roof panels to expand and contract with roof panel temperature chang-

es. 11. Self-Drilling Fasteners: Not permitted. 12. Ridge Assembly:

a. Design ridge assembly to allow roof panels to move lengthwise with expansion and contrac-tion as roof panel temperature changes.

b. Factory punch parts for correct field assembly. c. Install panel closures and interior reinforcing straps to seal panel ends at ridge. d. Do not expose attachment fasteners on weather side. e. Use lock seam plug to seal lock seam portion of panel. f. High-Tensile Steel Ridge Cover: Span from panel closure to panel closure and flex as roof

system expands and contracts.

H. Provision for Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provision for Thermal Expansion Movement of Roof Panels: Clips with movable tab.

a. Stainless Steel Tabs: Factory centered on roof clip when installed to ensure full movement in either direction.

b. Maximum Force of 8 Pounds: Required to initiate tab movement. c. Each Clip: Accommodates a minimum of 1.25-inch movement in either direction.

2. Roof: Provide for thermal expansion and contraction without detrimental effects on roof panels, with plus or minus 100-degree F temperature difference between interior structural framework of building and of roof panels.

I. Fasteners: 1. Make connections of roof panels to structural members, except at eaves, with clips with movable

stainless steel tabs, seamed into standing seam side lap. 2. Fasten panel clips to structural members with “ScruboltTM” fasteners in accordance with erection

drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer, using factory-punched holes in structur-al members. a. Fasteners: Metal-backed rubber washer to serve as torque indicator.

3. Exposed fasteners penetrating metal roof membrane at the following locations do not exceed the frequency listed: a. Basic Panel System: 0 per square foot. b. High Eave Trim, No Parapet: 2 per linear foot.


13 34 19 - 13


c. Exterior Eave Gutter: 2 per linear foot. d. Panel Splices: 2 per linear foot. e. Gable Trim: 0 per linear foot. f. High Eave with Parapet: 0 per linear foot. g. Ridge: 0 per linear foot. h. Low Eave Structural: 1.5 per linear foot.

J. Accessories: 1. Accessories (i.e., ventilators, gutters, fascia): Standard with metal building system manufacturer,

unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified. 2. Exterior Metal Coating on Gutters, Downspouts, Gable Trim, and Eave Trim: “Butler-CoteTM ” finish

system, full-strength, 70 percent “Kynar 500” or “Hylar 5000” fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating. 3. Location of Standard Accessories: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal building sys-

tem manufacturer. 4. Material used in flashing and transition parts and furnished as standard by metal building system

manufacturer may or may not match roof panel material. a. Parts: Compatible and not cause corrosive condition. b. Copper and Lead Materials: Do not use with Galvalume panels.

K. Energy Conservation: Must Meet 2018 IECC Performance standards. 1. Insulate purlins to eliminate "thermal short circuits" between purlins and roof panels. 2. Minimize heat loss (thermal short circuit) caused by compression of blanket insulation between

structural members and roof panels by use of thermal block at each purlin location.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Structural Performance:

1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.7 PAD-TYPE SNOW GUARDS

A. Flat-Mounted Metal Snow Guard Pads:

1. Material: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive metal. 2. Finish and Color: Powder coat; Color to match metal roofing.

2.8 METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.


13 34 19 - 14


Include accessories required for weathertight installation (air and water barrier)- Stitch screws at 20” oc and continuous ½” x 3/32” tape sealer at panel side-lap.

B. Box-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MP-1): Formed with raised, box-shaped ribs, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled 60 degrees or more. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI; PBR, Wide

Rib Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding

period. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: MBCI – selected by architect from manuf. standard . d. Finish: Smooth. e. Orientation: Vertical.

C. Box-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MP-2): Formed with raised, box-shaped ribs, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled 60 degrees or more. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI; 7.2 Narrow

Rib Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding



D. ALTERNATE: Box-Rib-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MP-1): Formed with raised, box-shaped ribs, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled 60 degrees or more. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI; Designer

Series - Fluted, Wide Rib Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding




13 34 19 - 15


E. ALTERNATE: Box-Rib-Profile, Concealed -Fastener Metal Wall Panels (MP-2): Formed with raised, box-shaped ribs, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled 60 degrees or more. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI; Masterline 16

Narrow Rib Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Or equal if and as specifically approved by Architect by Addendum during the bidding



F. Materials:

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted-flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality.

b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 50; structural quality.

c. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

G. Finishes:

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels : Basis of Design: MBCI: FW-120. Designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps.


13 34 19 - 16


1. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.022-inch nominal thickness.

a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: selected by architect from manuf. standard.

2. Panel Coverage: 12 inches. 3. Panel Height: 1.5 inch.

2.10 THERMAL INSULATION

A. Faced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; 2-inch- wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.

B. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, type indicated below; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Nonreflective Faced: Type II (blankets with nonreflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less).

2. Reflective Faced: Type III (blankets with reflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less).

3. Unfaced: Type I (blankets without membrane covering), passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

a. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method.

1) Composition: White vinyl film facing, fiberglass scrim reinforcement, and metallized-polyester film backing.

C. Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (foil facing), Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core. Provide units tested for interior exposure without an approved thermal barrier.

D. Retainer Strips: 0.025-inch nominal-thickness, formed, metallic-coated steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing.

E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.l

F. Wall and Roof Liner System: Simple Saver insulation system as manufactured by Thermal Design with installed total insulation value of R-30 and an average installed thickness of 9”. Must Meet 2018 IECC Performance standards.

1. Syseal Fabric: Woven reinforced high-density polyethylene yarns coated on both sides with a continuous white polyethylene film.

a. Wall fabric grade shall be Syseal FP (White). b. The fabric shall comply with ASTM E84, and shall be Class A compliant with a low flame

spread index of 25 or less. c. Fabric perm rating shall be ≤0.02 grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96. d. Sealants: Simple Saver system G524 High Tack Sealant for sealing vapor retarder seams.


13 34 19 - 17


2. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket meeting ASTM C991 Type 1, ASTM E136 and ASTM E84. 3. Insulation Hangers: Fast-R preformed, rigid insulation hangers for supporting insulation between

wall girts. a. Coiled hangers are not allowed.

4. Thermal Break: 1” polystyrene Snap-R thermal block.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load

requirements. 3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material

recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-

cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1-inch standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene.

C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-

cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.

1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.


13 34 19 - 18


2. Opening Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

E. Gutters: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. 2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.

F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Option for open front downspout.

1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.

G. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.

H. Materials:

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

a. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM sealing washer.

b. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws.

c. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.

d. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

2. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

3. Metal Panel Sealants:

a. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene-compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size.

b. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane or polysulfide; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate product.


13 34 19 - 19


B. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. Special inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

C. Testing: Test and inspect shop connections for metal buildings according to the following:

1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.

1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.

B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances.

C. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.

1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. 2. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous, submerged arc-welding process. 3. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing

between frame web and purlin web or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.

4. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing. 5. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary

framing with specified primer after fabrication.

D. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.


13 34 19 - 20


1. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. 2. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime

uncoated secondary framing with specified primer after fabrication.

E. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.

1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.

C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition.

B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

D. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.


13 34 19 - 21


1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature

when structure will be completed and in service.

F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified.

a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.

G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing.

1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Locate canopy framing as indicated. 4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers,

ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.

1. Tighten rod to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.

I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.

3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer.


13 34 19 - 22


1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.

B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes.

a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.

2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements.

Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in

alignment. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

C. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.

1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-

tapping screws.


13 34 19 - 23


B. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so that

clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal

expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge caps.

C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

D. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing.

2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels

over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal

expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all

openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete,

and elsewhere as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping

screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


13 34 19 - 24


3.7 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal soffit panels the full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

3.8 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping.

2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

3. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.

B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:

1. Two-Layers-between-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry vapor-retarder-facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course and maintaining continuity of retarder. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space between purlins formed by thermal spacer blocks. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation.

a. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks.

2. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.

C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.

1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.

2. Sound-Absorption Insulation: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated for metal liner panels, cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid.

D. Simple Saver Wall System: Sheet the building with just the thermal break applied to the exterior of the girts. Insulation is cut to the required lengths to fit vertically between the girts and installed in the girt spaces and impaled on Fast-R insulation hangers.

1. Fluff the insulation to the specified thickness, making sure there are no gaps or voids. Insulate the complete wall section.

2. Apply the wall vapor retarder fabric by clamping it into position over the eave straps. Once in position, the fasteners are installed through the wall straps, eave strap and into each roof strap, permanently clamping the wall fabric between them.


13 34 19 - 25


3. Seal the wall fabric and to the roof fabric and to the base angle, or base C channel as well as column flanges.

4. Additional straps are installed along the base angle and each column to retain the system permanently in place.

3.9 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.


13 34 19 - 26



A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Inspection of fabricators. 2. Steel construction.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

D. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
